Prove2Me
Navigate
DiscoverCollectionsFormalpediaBlogsUsersMomentumMy Missions+
Prove2Me
⌕
Log in

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

Probability

1,628 missions · 683 completed

Missions

Open945Completed683All1628
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Residual Life Time at Great Age 5: If |c − ((1 − F)/F′)′| ≤ ε for t ≥ t₀, the Residual Life Normed by (1 − F(t))/F′(t) Is Within ε of Π_{0,c} for t ≥ t₀Research Paper

Motivation

The residual life time of a lifetime XXX at age ttt is the excess X−tX - tX−t given survival, X>tX > tX>t. How it behaves at great ages is a question in reliability (remaining life of an item that has already lasted long), in insurance and demography (remaining life at old age), and in the peaks-over-threshold method of extreme value statistics, where exceedances over a high threshold are modelled by a generalized Pareto law.

Balkema and de Haan (Residual Life Time at Great Age, Ann. Probab. 2 (1974) 792–804) determined every possible limit law of the suitably normed residual life as t→∞t \to \inftyt→∞, and their domains of attraction. For continuous limits, the classical sufficient conditions are von Mises' conditions (1936) on the derivative of (1−F)/F′(1 - F)/F'(1−F)/F′. Section 4 of the paper goes further: it gives inequalities that hold at every finite age t≥t0t \ge t_0t≥t0​, not only in the limit. This mission formalizes that finite-ttt result, the Corollary to Theorem 7.

Timeline: von Mises (1936) gives sufficient conditions for domains of attraction of extreme value laws; Balkema and de Haan (1974) prove the limit theorems for residual life and the finite-ttt bounds formalized here; Pickands (1975, Ann. Statist. 3, 119–131) proves the corresponding approximation by the generalized Pareto law for excesses, the result now known as the Pickands–Balkema–de Haan theorem.

Setting

Let XXX be a real random variable with distribution function FFF. The residual life distribution function at age ttt is

Ft(x)=P{X−t≤x∣X>t}.F_t(x) = P\{X - t \le x \mid X > t\}.Ft​(x)=P{X−t≤x∣X>t}.

Assume FFF has a positive, differentiable density F′F'F′ for t≥t0t \ge t_0t≥t0​, and define the norming function

a(t)=1−F(t)F′(t)(t≥t0),a(t) = \frac{1 - F(t)}{F'(t)} \qquad (t \ge t_0),a(t)=F′(t)1−F(t)​(t≥t0​),

the reciprocal of the hazard rate. The normed residual life is (X−t)/a(t)(X - t)/a(t)(X−t)/a(t) given X>tX > tX>t, with distribution function P{(X−t)/a(t)≤x∣X>t}=Ft(x a(t))P\{(X - t)/a(t) \le x \mid X > t\} = F_t(x\,a(t))P{(X−t)/a(t)≤x∣X>t}=Ft​(xa(t)).

The comparison laws are the distribution functions Π0,c\Pi_{0,c}Π0,c​, c∈Rc \in \mathbb Rc∈R, all vanishing for x<0x < 0x<0:

  • for c>0c > 0c>0, Π0,c(x)=1−(1+cx)−1/c\Pi_{0,c}(x) = 1 - (1 + cx)^{-1/c}Π0,c​(x)=1−(1+cx)−1/c for x≥0x \ge 0x≥0 (a generalized Pareto law);
  • for c=0c = 0c=0, Π0,0(x)=Π(x)=1−e−x\Pi_{0,0}(x) = \Pi(x) = 1 - e^{-x}Π0,0​(x)=Π(x)=1−e−x for x≥0x \ge 0x≥0 (the exponential law);
  • for c<0c < 0c<0, Π0,c(x)=1−(1+cx)−1/c\Pi_{0,c}(x) = 1 - (1 + cx)^{-1/c}Π0,c​(x)=1−(1+cx)−1/c for 0≤x≤∣c∣−10 \le x \le |c|^{-1}0≤x≤∣c∣−1, and 111 beyond (bounded support).

Formalization targets

Goal: the Corollary to Theorem 7

If c≥0c \ge 0c≥0 and ε≥0\varepsilon \ge 0ε≥0 satisfy ∣c−a′(t)∣≤ε|c - a'(t)| \le \varepsilon∣c−a′(t)∣≤ε for t≥t0t \ge t_0t≥t0​, then

∣Π0,c(x)−P{X−ta(t)≤x | X>t}∣≤εfor all x and all t≥t0.\left|\Pi_{0,c}(x) - P\left\{\frac{X - t}{a(t)} \le x \,\middle|\, X > t\right\}\right| \le \varepsilon \qquad \text{for all } x \text{ and all } t \ge t_0 .​Π0,c​(x)−P{a(t)X−t​≤x​X>t}​≤εfor all x and all t≥t0​.

Milestones

  1. The bounds (13): if c1≤a′≤c2c_1 \le a' \le c_2c1​≤a′≤c2​ on [t0,∞)[t_0, \infty)[t0​,∞), then 1+c1x≤a(t+xa(t))/a(t)≤1+c2x1 + c_1 x \le a(t + x a(t))/a(t) \le 1 + c_2 x1+c1​x≤a(t+xa(t))/a(t)≤1+c2​x for t≥t0t \ge t_0t≥t0​, x≥0x \ge 0x≥0.
  2. The exponential representation
P{X−ta(t)>x | X>t}=1−F(t+xa(t))1−F(t)=exp⁡(−∫0xa(t)a(t+sa(t)) ds).P\left\{\frac{X - t}{a(t)} > x \,\middle|\, X > t\right\} = \frac{1 - F(t + x a(t))}{1 - F(t)} = \exp\left(-\int_0^x \frac{a(t)}{a(t + s a(t))}\, ds\right).P{a(t)X−t​>x​X>t}=1−F(t)1−F(t+xa(t))​=exp(−∫0x​a(t+sa(t))a(t)​ds).
  1. Theorem 7: if c1≤a′(t)≤c2c_1 \le a'(t) \le c_2c1​≤a′(t)≤c2​ for t≥t0t \ge t_0t≥t0​, then
Π0,c2(x)≤P{X−ta(t)≤x | X>t}≤Π0,c1(x)(t≥t0, x∈R).\Pi_{0,c_2}(x) \le P\left\{\frac{X - t}{a(t)} \le x \,\middle|\, X > t\right\} \le \Pi_{0,c_1}(x) \qquad (t \ge t_0,\ x \in \mathbb R).Π0,c2​​(x)≤P{a(t)X−t​≤x​X>t}≤Π0,c1​​(x)(t≥t0​, x∈R).
  1. σ(u)=u−2(e−u−1+u)=∫01∫0te−us ds dt\sigma(u) = u^{-2}(e^{-u} - 1 + u) = \int_0^1\int_0^t e^{-us}\,ds\,dtσ(u)=u−2(e−u−1+u)=∫01​∫0t​e−usdsdt is positive and decreasing.
  2. Lemma 4: 0≤−(∂/∂c)Π0,c(x)<10 \le -(\partial/\partial c)\Pi_{0,c}(x) < 10≤−(∂/∂c)Π0,c​(x)<1 for c>−1c > -1c>−1, x≠0x \ne 0x=0, cx≠−1cx \ne -1cx=−1.
  3. ∣Π0,c(x)−Π0,c0(x)∣≤∣c−c0∣|\Pi_{0,c}(x) - \Pi_{0,c_0}(x)| \le |c - c_0|∣Π0,c​(x)−Π0,c0​​(x)∣≤∣c−c0​∣ for c≥0c \ge 0c≥0 and all real c0c_0c0​, xxx.

The goal is the Corollary because it is the paper's final statement of Section 4: a single parameter ccc and a single error ε\varepsilonε, with no limit taken. Theorem 7 is the stronger two-parameter sandwich it rests on.

Significance

The result. Theorem 7 and its Corollary are a quantitative, non-asymptotic form of the von Mises condition ddt1−F(t)F′(t)→c\frac{d}{dt}\frac{1-F(t)}{F'(t)} \to cdtd​F′(t)1−F(t)​→c. If the derivative of the reciprocal hazard stays within ε\varepsilonε of ccc from age t0t_0t0​ on, then at every such age the normed excess distribution is uniformly within ε\varepsilonε of the generalized Pareto (or exponential) law Π0,c\Pi_{0,c}Π0,c​. Letting ε→0\varepsilon \to 0ε→0 along t0→∞t_0 \to \inftyt0​→∞ recovers convergence to Π0,c\Pi_{0,c}Π0,c​, and the bound itself quantifies the error of the generalized Pareto approximation used in threshold-exceedance modelling.

Formalizing it. The result is proved in the paper (1974), with short proofs. To our knowledge no part of it has a machine-checked proof. The mission produces checked versions of the theorem, the corollary and the elementary lemmas about the family Π0,c\Pi_{0,c}Π0,c​: its monotonicity and Lipschitz dependence on the parameter ccc, including across the case change at c=0c = 0c=0. Those facts about the generalized Pareto family are reusable in any formal development of extreme value statistics.

Difficulty

The analytic content is elementary, but several steps hide case analysis. The Lipschitz bound in ccc requires the derivative of Π0,c(x)\Pi_{0,c}(x)Π0,c​(x) in ccc across c=0c = 0c=0, where the formula changes from 1−(1+cx)−1/c1 - (1+cx)^{-1/c}1−(1+cx)−1/c to 1−e−x1 - e^{-x}1−e−x, and across the boundary cx=−1cx = -1cx=−1 of the support when c<0c < 0c<0, where the function is not differentiable. The bound −∂cΠ0,c<1-\partial_c \Pi_{0,c} < 1−∂c​Π0,c​<1 is not a crude estimate: it reduces to the comparison σ(u)<σ(−ψ)\sigma(u) < \sigma(-\psi)σ(u)<σ(−ψ) for the function σ(u)=u−2(e−u−1+u)\sigma(u) = u^{-2}(e^{-u} - 1 + u)σ(u)=u−2(e−u−1+u), which needs its strict monotonicity on all of R\mathbb RR, including u=0u = 0u=0 where the closed form is undefined. In Theorem 7 the lower bound 1+c1x1 + c_1 x1+c1​x in (13) becomes negative for c1<0c_1 < 0c1​<0 and large xxx; this is exactly where the comparison law Π0,c1\Pi_{0,c_1}Π0,c1​​ reaches 111, and the argument must handle it. The orientation is easy to get wrong: the upper bound c2c_2c2​ on the derivative gives the lower bound Π0,c2\Pi_{0,c_2}Π0,c2​​, since Π0,c(x)\Pi_{0,c}(x)Π0,c​(x) decreases in ccc.

Formalization scope

The source is the published Annals of Probability article (DOI 10.1214/aop/1176996548); page numbers are the journal's.

  • The law of XXX is a probability measure μ on ℝ, FFF is Mathlib's cdf μ, and Ft(x)=μ((t,t+x])/μ((t,∞))F_t(x) = \mu((t, t+x]) / \mu((t, \infty))Ft​(x)=μ((t,t+x])/μ((t,∞)). The normed probability P{(X−t)/a(t)≤x∣X>t}P\{(X-t)/a(t) \le x \mid X > t\}P{(X−t)/a(t)≤x∣X>t} is Ft(x a(t))F_t(x\,a(t))Ft​(xa(t)).
  • "Positive, differentiable density for t≥t0t \ge t_0t≥t0​" is: for t≥t0t \ge t_0t≥t0​, cdf μ has derivative f(t)>0f(t) > 0f(t)>0 and fff has derivative f′(t)f'(t)f′(t), both within [t0,∞)[t_0, \infty)[t0​,∞); nothing is assumed to the left of t0t_0t0​.
  • The derivative ddta(t)\frac{d}{dt}a(t)dtd​a(t) is a named function a′a'a′ with HasDerivWithinAt on [t0,∞)[t_0, \infty)[t0​,∞); it is the derivative the density hypothesis already provides, so this adds no assumption. Bare deriv is not used.
  • Completion of Π0,c\Pi_{0,c}Π0,c​ for c<0c < 0c<0. The paper (p. 801) prints the formula only for 0≤x≤∣c∣−10 \le x \le |c|^{-1}0≤x≤∣c∣−1. The formalization sets Π0,c(x)=1\Pi_{0,c}(x) = 1Π0,c​(x)=1 for x>∣c∣−1x > |c|^{-1}x>∣c∣−1, as "distribution function" requires and as the proof of Lemma 4 uses ("Π0,c(x)\Pi_{0,c}(x)Π0,c​(x) is constant on both components of {c>−1}∖R\{c > -1\}\setminus R{c>−1}∖R"). The formula gives 111 at x=∣c∣−1x = |c|^{-1}x=∣c∣−1, so the completion is continuous.
  • Π0,0\Pi_{0,0}Π0,0​ is a separate branch (1−e−x1 - e^{-x}1−e−x), not the formula with 1/01/01/0.
  • σ\sigmaσ is defined as ∫01∫0te−us ds dt\int_0^1\int_0^t e^{-us}\,ds\,dt∫01​∫0t​e−usdsdt, and the closed form u−2(e−u−1+u)u^{-2}(e^{-u} - 1 + u)u−2(e−u−1+u) for u≠0u \ne 0u=0 is part of milestone 4. "Decreasing" is stated as strictly decreasing, which is what the proof of Lemma 4 uses (σ(u)<σ(−ψ)\sigma(u) < \sigma(-\psi)σ(u)<σ(−ψ)).
  • Lemma 4 states the differentiability of c↦Π0,c(x)c \mapsto \Pi_{0,c}(x)c↦Π0,c​(x) at ccc together with the bound 0≤−d<10 \le -d < 10≤−d<1 on its derivative ddd.
  • The bounds (13) are stated in both printed forms.
  • No sign condition is added on c1,c2c_1, c_2c1​,c2​ in Theorem 7; c1c_1c1​ may be any real number, and c−εc - \varepsilonc−ε in the Corollary may be negative.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the conclusion is a bound at every real xxx and every t≥t0t \ge t_0t≥t0​ with a(t)>0a(t) > 0a(t)>0, the conditional probability divides by μ((t,∞))>0\mu((t,\infty)) > 0μ((t,∞))>0 (which the density hypothesis implies), and the hypotheses are satisfied by, for example, the exponential law (a≡1a \equiv 1a≡1, c=0c = 0c=0) and the Pareto law 1−(1+x)−α1 - (1+x)^{-\alpha}1−(1+x)−α (a(t)=(1+t)/αa(t) = (1+t)/\alphaa(t)=(1+t)/α, c=1/αc = 1/\alphac=1/α).

A complete development needs the fundamental theorem of calculus with one-sided derivatives, a change of variables in interval integrals, and calculus of Real.rpow in the exponent parameter. The lemmas on Π0,c\Pi_{0,c}Π0,c​ and σ\sigmaσ are reusable beyond this mission; proofs of any milestone are welcome independently.

Selected references

  • A. A. Balkema, L. de Haan, Residual Life Time at Great Age, The Annals of Probability 2 (1974), no. 5, 792–804. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176996548
  • R. von Mises, La distribution de la plus grande de n valeurs, Revue Mathématique de l'Union Interbalkanique 1 (1936), 141–160.
  • J. Pickands III, Statistical Inference Using Extreme Order Statistics, The Annals of Statistics 3 (1975), no. 1, 119–131. https://doi.org/10.1214/aos/1176343003
  • L. de Haan, On Regular Variation and Its Application to the Weak Convergence of Sample Extremes, Mathematical Centre Tracts 32, Amsterdam, 1970.
10 thms3 active usersReviewed
Dynamic ProgrammingMachine LearningOperations Research+1·Captain: mikedeng1

Stable Function Approximation in Dynamic Programming II: In a Nondiscounted MDP with All Policies Proper, Value Iteration Through a Self-Weighted Averager ConvergesResearch Paper

Motivation

Value iteration solves a Markov decision process by repeatedly applying the Bellman backup to a table of state values. When the state space is too large for a table, the values are stored in a function approximator instead: each backup is followed by a fit, and the fitted function is backed up again. This approximate value iteration is the basis of fitted dynamic programming and of much of reinforcement learning, and it was known in the early 1990s to diverge for common approximators such as linear regression and neural networks (Boyan and Moore, 1995, cited in the report as [BM95]).

Gordon's technical report (Stable Function Approximation in Dynamic Programming, CMU-CS-95-103, 1995; conference version at ICML 1995) identified a class of approximators, the averagers (k-nearest-neighbour, kernel averaging, linear and bilinear interpolation on a grid), for which the combination is stable. For discounted problems stability follows from a norm argument. For nondiscounted problems, where the backup contracts only in a weighted norm, that argument fails, and the report proves convergence by a different route: approximate value iteration is exact value iteration on a derived MDP. This mission formalizes that route and its conclusion, Corollary 4.1 (p. 11).

Setting

A finite nondiscounted Markov decision process MMM has non-goal states x=1,…,nx=1,\dots,nx=1,…,n, a finite nonempty action set U(x)U(x)U(x) at each state, an expected one-step cost cxac_{xa}cxa​, and transition probabilities paxy≥0p_{axy}\ge 0paxy​≥0 with ∑ypaxy≤1\sum_y p_{axy}\le 1∑y​paxy​≤1. The missing mass 1−∑ypaxy1-\sum_y p_{axy}1−∑y​paxy​ is the probability of moving to a cost-free absorbing goal state, which the paper calls state 111. A value function is a vector V∈RnV\in\mathbb R^nV∈Rn; the goal's value is 000. The parallel value backup is

(TMV)(x)=min⁡a∈U(x)[cxa+∑ypaxyV(y)],(T_M V)(x)=\min_{a\in U(x)}\Bigl[c_{xa}+\sum_y p_{axy}V(y)\Bigr],(TM​V)(x)=a∈U(x)min​[cxa​+y∑​paxy​V(y)],

and with a discount factor γ\gammaγ the sum is multiplied by γ\gammaγ. A policy μ\muμ chooses an admissible action at each state; it is proper if, from every starting state, the probability of having reached the goal after ttt steps tends to 111.

An averager AAA consists of constants kyk_yky​, nonnegative weights βy\beta_yβy​ and nonnegative weights βyz\beta_{yz}βyz​ (zzz ranging over all states, the goal included) with βy+∑zβyz=1\beta_y+\sum_z\beta_{yz}=1βy​+∑z​βyz​=1. Its mapping is MA(V)(y)=βyky+∑zβyzV(z)M_A(V)(y)=\beta_yk_y+\sum_z\beta_{yz}V(z)MA​(V)(y)=βy​ky​+∑z​βyz​V(z). Two operators MFM_FMF​ and TTT are compatible if (MF∘T)k(V0)(M_F\circ T)^k(V_0)(MF​∘T)k(V0​) converges from every initial guess V0V_0V0​.

The derived MDP M′M'M′ has the same states and actions, transition probabilities paxz′=∑ypaxyβyzp'_{axz}=\sum_y p_{axy}\beta_{yz}paxz′​=∑y​paxy​βyz​ to non-goal states zzz, the rest of the mass going to the goal, and costs cxa′=cxa+γ∑ypaxyβykyc'_{xa}=c_{xa}+\gamma\sum_{y}p_{axy}\beta_yk_ycxa′​=cxa​+γ∑y​paxy​βy​ky​.

The states are layered by distance from the goal: S1={1}S_1=\{1\}S1​={1}, Uk=⋃j<kSjU_k=\bigcup_{j<k}S_jUk​=⋃j<k​Sj​, and SkS_kSk​ is the set of states outside UkU_kUk​ from which every action reaches UkU_kUk​ with positive probability. Write k(x)k(x)k(x) for the index of the layer containing xxx. The averager is self-weighted for MMM if for every state yyy either βy>0\beta_y>0βy​>0 or βyx>0\beta_{yx}>0βyx​>0 for some state xxx with k(x)≤k(y)k(x)\le k(y)k(x)≤k(y).

Formalization targets

Goal: Corollary 4.1 (p. 11)

If every policy of MMM is proper and AAA is self-weighted for MMM, then for every initial guess V0V_0V0​ both

(MA∘TM)k(V0)and(TM∘MA)k(V0)(M_A\circ T_M)^k(V_0)\quad\text{and}\quad(T_M\circ M_A)^k(V_0)(MA​∘TM​)k(V0​)and(TM​∘MA​)k(V0​)

converge as k→∞k\to\inftyk→∞. The first is the page's "TMT_MTM​ and MAM_AMA​ are compatible", the second its "approximate value iteration … will converge".

Milestones

  1. Theorem 4.1 (Derived MDP, p. 7): TM′=TM∘MAT_{M'}=T_M\circ M_ATM′​=TM​∘MA​, for every discount factor and for the nondiscounted backup.
  2. Exhaustiveness (p. 10, after [BT89]): if all policies of MMM are proper, every state lies in some layer SkS_kSk​.
  3. M′M'M′ terminates (p. 10): if all policies of MMM are proper and AAA is self-weighted, there is m>0m>0m>0 such that under every policy of M′M'M′ and from every state the goal is reached within mmm steps with positive probability; in particular every policy of M′M'M′ is proper.
  4. Theorem 2.3 (p. 4), in its all-policies-terminate case: value iteration converges from any initial guess. This is the published, proved item BertsekasDP.ssp_main_theorem.

A further item, Theorem 6.1 (p. 12), says the limit is V∗V^*V∗ when the optimal value function is a fixed point of MAM_AMA​, under self-weighting or under positive costs with k≥0k\ge 0k≥0.

Significance

The corollary gives a checkable, purely combinatorial condition on the approximator and the transition graph under which fitted value iteration on a stochastic shortest path problem cannot diverge. Weight decay (βy>0\beta_y>0βy​>0 everywhere) and any averager that only ever averages a state's value with values no farther from the goal satisfy it. The derived-MDP identity, Theorem 4.1, is the tool the rest of the report builds on (§5, §6.1, Appendix A): it reduces questions about approximate dynamic programming with averagers (convergence, the limit's error, the online Q-learning variant) to questions about an ordinary MDP.

The results are proved in the report, in prose. They have no machine-checked version. The formal development needed here is a finite stochastic shortest path theory (proper policies, the layer partition, termination bounds) on top of the published model BertsekasSSPModel and the proved BertsekasDP.ssp_main_theorem.

Difficulty

The obvious argument fails. If all policies of MMM are proper, TMT_MTM​ contracts in some weighted max norm, and MAM_AMA​ is a nonexpansion in the unweighted max norm, but MAM_AMA​ can expand the weighted norm, so the composition need not contract. Figure 4 of the report gives a three-state chain and an averager, replacing V(2)V(2)V(2) by V(3)V(3)V(3), for which approximate value iteration diverges. The proof therefore has to go through M′M'M′ and show that self-weighting makes M′M'M′ terminate under every policy. That is a probabilistic statement about all, possibly nonstationary, policies of a new process, derived from a layer structure of the old one. Exhaustiveness of the layers itself needs a policy-construction argument.

Formalization scope

The MDP is the published BertsekasSSPModel n C: non-goal states Fin n, a finite action type C with admissible sets M.U i, costs M.g, and transition probabilities M.p whose deficit is the probability of termination. Gordon's state 1 is this implicit termination state: its value is 000 by construction, and where the partition and the averager's goal weight need to name it, it is none : Option (Fin n). This realises the page's two "without loss of generality" steps (state 1 cost-free and absorbing; β1=1\beta_1=1β1​=1, k1=0k_1=0k1​=0). The nondiscounted backup is BertsekasSSPBellmanOp M, the discounted one BertsekasDiscountedBellmanOp M γ.

The averager acts on whole value functions over the state set. An approximator that fits only a sample X0X_0X0​ of states is the special case βyx=0\beta_{yx}=0βyx​=0 for x∉X0x\notin X_0x∈/X0​. "All policies proper" quantifies over stationary policies μ : Fin n → C with admissible actions, as on p. 3. Self-weightedness is stated through layer membership, which agrees with the page's k(x)k(x)k(x) whenever the partition is exhaustive (milestone 2). Theorem 6.1 takes V∗V^*V∗ as a real fixed point of the backup; under either of its cases such a fixed point is unique and optimal. Convergence is in Rn\mathbb R^nRn, which is the same as convergence in max norm.

The goal's hypotheses concern MMM and AAA only. A formalization that assumed properness of the derived MDP, dropped the "every action" quantifier in the layers (making the partition and self-weighting weaker notions), or dropped k(x)≤k(y)k(x)\le k(y)k(x)≤k(y) (making every averager with a positive weight self-weighted) would be a different theorem.

Reusable beyond this mission: the layer partition and its exhaustiveness, and the termination bound for the derived model, are general finite stochastic shortest path facts. Contributions to any milestone are welcome, and so are proofs of the definitions-level lemmas they rely on.

Selected references

  • G. J. Gordon, Stable Function Approximation in Dynamic Programming, Technical Report CMU-CS-95-103, Carnegie Mellon University, 1995. Conference version in Proceedings of the 12th International Conference on Machine Learning (ICML), 1995. https://doi.org/10.1016/B978-1-55860-377-6.50040-2
  • D. P. Bertsekas and J. N. Tsitsiklis, Parallel and Distributed Computation: Numerical Methods, Prentice Hall, 1989. ([BT89] in the report.)
  • D. P. Bertsekas and J. N. Tsitsiklis, An Analysis of Stochastic Shortest Path Problems, Mathematics of Operations Research 16(3), 1991. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.16.3.580
  • J. A. Boyan and A. W. Moore, Generalization in Reinforcement Learning: Safely Approximating the Value Function, Advances in Neural Information Processing Systems 7, Morgan Kaufmann, 1995. ([BM95] in the report.)
8 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
AnalysisHarmonic Analysis·Captain: mikedeng1

Distribution Function Inequalities for Martingales 2: Gundy's Decomposition of an L¹-Bounded Martingale, with One Stopping TimeResearch Paper

Motivation

Many operators of harmonic analysis are bounded on L2L^2L2 by an orthogonality argument but fail to be bounded on L1L^1L1; what survives at p=1p=1p=1 is a weak-type estimate λ P(∣Tf∣>λ)≤c ∥f∥1\lambda\,P(|Tf|>\lambda)\le c\,\|f\|_1λP(∣Tf∣>λ)≤c∥f∥1​. For singular integrals the standard route to such an estimate is the Calderón–Zygmund decomposition, which splits a function at height λ\lambdaλ into a bounded part and a part supported on a small set. Martingale theory has the same need: square functions, martingale transforms and maximal operators of martingales are bounded on L2L^2L2 for orthogonality reasons, and their behaviour on L1L^1L1-bounded martingales is the delicate endpoint.

R. F. Gundy (1968) supplied the martingale analogue: an L1L^1L1-bounded martingale can be written as the sum of three martingales, one bounded in L2L^2L2, one whose differences are absolutely summable in L1L^1L1, and one that is non-zero only on an event of small probability (Gundy 1968). Gundy's construction used several stopping times. In his 1971 Wald Memorial Lectures, published as Distribution Function Inequalities for Martingales (Burkholder 1973), D. L. Burkholder gave a simplified version of the decomposition in which only one stopping time is used, with explicit constants 222, 444 and 111. This mission formalizes that version, Theorem 4.1 of the lectures, together with the facts its proof rests on.

Timeline:

  • 1953. J. L. Doob's Stochastic Processes establishes almost-everywhere convergence of L1L^1L1-bounded martingales and the maximal inequality.
  • 1966. D. G. Austin proves that the integral of S2(f)S^2(f)S2(f) over {f∗≤λ}\{f^*\le\lambda\}{f∗≤λ} is finite for an L1L^1L1-bounded martingale (Austin 1966).
  • 1968. Gundy proves the decomposition theorem for L1L^1L1-bounded martingales, with applications to weak-type estimates.
  • 1973. Burkholder's Lemma 2.1, a refinement of Austin's theorem, yields a one-stopping-time proof of Gundy's decomposition with explicit constants.

Setting

Let (Ω,A,P)(\Omega,\mathcal A,P)(Ω,A,P) be a probability space and A0⊆A1⊆⋯\mathcal A_0\subseteq\mathcal A_1\subseteq\cdotsA0​⊆A1​⊆⋯ a nondecreasing sequence of sub-σ\sigmaσ-fields of A\mathcal AA. A martingale relative to A1,A2,…\mathcal A_1,\mathcal A_2,\dotsA1​,A2​,… is a sequence f=(f1,f2,… )f=(f_1,f_2,\dots)f=(f1​,f2​,…) of integrable random variables with fnf_nfn​ An\mathcal A_nAn​-measurable and E(fn+1∣An)=fnE(f_{n+1}\mid\mathcal A_n)=f_nE(fn+1​∣An​)=fn​. Its difference sequence is d=(d1,d2,… )d=(d_1,d_2,\dots)d=(d1​,d2​,…) with fn=∑k=1ndkf_n=\sum_{k=1}^n d_kfn​=∑k=1n​dk​, i.e. d1=f1d_1=f_1d1​=f1​, dk=fk−fk−1d_k=f_k-f_{k-1}dk​=fk​−fk−1​ (the convention is f0=0f_0=0f0​=0).

The maximal function is f∗=sup⁡n≥1∣fn∣f^*=\sup_{n\ge1}|f_n|f∗=supn≥1​∣fn​∣, the square function is S(f)=[∑k≥1dk2]1/2S(f)=\big[\sum_{k\ge1}d_k^2\big]^{1/2}S(f)=[∑k≥1​dk2​]1/2, and Sn(f)S_n(f)Sn​(f) is its nnn-th partial version. For 0<p<∞0<p<\infty0<p<∞,

∥f∥p=sup⁡n≥1∥fn∥p,∥fn∥p=(E∣fn∣p)1/p,\|f\|_p=\sup_{n\ge1}\|f_n\|_p,\qquad \|f_n\|_p=(E|f_n|^p)^{1/p},∥f∥p​=n≥1sup​∥fn​∥p​,∥fn​∥p​=(E∣fn​∣p)1/p,

and fff is LpL^pLp-bounded when ∥f∥p<∞\|f\|_p<\infty∥f∥p​<∞. For λ>0\lambda>0λ>0, the exit time μ=inf⁡{n≥1:∣fn∣>λ}\mu=\inf\{n\ge1:|f_n|>\lambda\}μ=inf{n≥1:∣fn​∣>λ} (with inf⁡∅=∞\inf\emptyset=\inftyinf∅=∞) is the first index at which ∣fn∣|f_n|∣fn​∣ exceeds λ\lambdaλ; fμf_\mufμ​, fμ−1f_{\mu-1}fμ−1​, Sμ−1(f)S_{\mu-1}(f)Sμ−1​(f) denote evaluation at the random index, with f∞=lim⁡nfnf_\infty=\lim_n f_nf∞​=limn​fn​.

The Lean development names these objects dseq (ddd), sqFnN/sqFn (Sn(f)S_n(f)Sn​(f), S(f)S(f)S(f)), maxFnN/maxFn (fn∗f_n^*fn∗​, f∗f^*f∗), pNorm (∥f∥p\|f\|_p∥f∥p​), exitTime (μ\muμ) and valAt/sqFnAt (evaluation at an index in {0,1,…,∞}\{0,1,\dots,\infty\}{0,1,…,∞}), all in the namespace BurkholderDFI.Gundy.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.1 (p. 23)

For every L1L^1L1-bounded martingale fff and every λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 there are martingales X,Y,ZX,Y,ZX,Y,Z relative to the same σ\sigmaσ-fields, with difference sequences x,y,zx,y,zx,y,z, such that

f=X+Y+Z,∥X∥22≤2λ∥f∥1,∥∑k=1∞∣yk∣∥1≤4∥f∥1,P(Z∗>0)≤∥f∥1/λ.f=X+Y+Z,\qquad \|X\|_2^2\le2\lambda\|f\|_1,\qquad \Big\|\sum_{k=1}^\infty|y_k|\Big\|_1\le4\|f\|_1,\qquad P(Z^*>0)\le\|f\|_1/\lambda.f=X+Y+Z,∥X∥22​≤2λ∥f∥1​,​k=1∑∞​∣yk​∣​1​≤4∥f∥1​,P(Z∗>0)≤∥f∥1​/λ.

The three bounds hold together; each alone is trivial (f=0+0+ff=0+0+ff=0+0+f satisfies the first two, f=0+f+0f=0+f+0f=0+f+0 the first and last).

Milestones

  1. Doob's facts (cited, §1, p. 20). An L1L^1L1-bounded martingale or nonnegative submartingale converges almost everywhere, and ∥fμ∥1≤∥f∥1\|f_\mu\|_1\le\|f\|_1∥fμ​∥1​≤∥f∥1​ for every stopping time μ\muμ.
  2. (1.5) (p. 20). λpP(f∗>λ)≤∥f∥pp\lambda^pP(f^*>\lambda)\le\|f\|_p^pλpP(f∗>λ)≤∥f∥pp​ for 1≤p<∞1\le p<\infty1≤p<∞.
  3. Lemma 2.1 (p. 21). For the exit time μ\muμ above λ\lambdaλ,
∥Sμ−1(f)∥22+∥fμ−1∥22≤2Efμfμ−1≤2λ∥f∥1,\|S_{\mu-1}(f)\|_2^2+\|f_{\mu-1}\|_2^2\le2Ef_\mu f_{\mu-1}\le2\lambda\|f\|_1,∥Sμ−1​(f)∥22​+∥fμ−1​∥22​≤2Efμ​fμ−1​≤2λ∥f∥1​,

with equality on the left for martingales.

Significance

The result. The decomposition is the standard device for passing from L2L^2L2 to weak-type (1,1)(1,1)(1,1) estimates for martingale operators: an operator that is bounded on L2L^2L2, controlled by total variation on the second piece, and local in the sense that it vanishes where the third piece vanishes, is of weak type (1,1)(1,1)(1,1). Applications of the decomposition are given in Gundy's papers of 1968 and 1969 (On the class Llog⁡LL\log LLlogL, martingales, and singular integrals, Studia Math. 33), which the lectures cite for this purpose. The explicit constants 222, 444, 111 make every such weak-type constant explicit.

Formalizing it. The theorem is classical and proved; the remaining work is its formalization. As far as is known, no machine-checked proof of Gundy's decomposition, of Lemma 2.1, or of the weak-type maximal inequality in the form (1.5) for real martingales exists in Mathlib or on this platform. Mathlib provides almost-everywhere convergence of L1L^1L1-bounded submartingales and Doob's maximal inequality for nonnegative submartingales; the stopped-value bound for unbounded stopping times, the square-function identity of Lemma 2.1 and the decomposition itself are new. The milestones are shared with other missions of this series (Lemma 2.1 is also used for Burkholder's weak-type square function inequality and his exponential estimates), so each proof is reused.

Difficulty

The obvious attempt imitates the Calderón–Zygmund cut directly: truncate fff at height λ\lambdaλ, or stop it when it first exceeds λ\lambdaλ. Neither produces the required pieces. Truncation destroys the martingale property, and whatever restores it adds terms that must themselves be controlled in the right norm. Stopping at the exit time produces a martingale bounded by λ\lambdaλ only up to the overshoot at the exit, which is not bounded and lives on an event that is small only in probability. The L2L^2L2 estimate (4.2) is therefore not a consequence of boundedness; it needs a quantitative square-function bound for the martingale up to the exit, which is the content of Lemma 2.1, and that lemma in turn needs the limit f∞f_\inftyf∞​ and the stopped values fμf_\mufμ​ on {μ=∞}\{\mu=\infty\}{μ=∞} — so Doob's convergence theorem cannot be avoided.

Formalization scope

Processes are functions f : ℕ → Ω → ℝ with a Mathlib Filtration ℕ and Mathlib's Martingale/Submartingale. The paper indexes from 111; Lean's index 000 is never read by any quantity in the statements, which use the paper's convention f0=0f_0=0f0​=0. Mathlib's martingale definition additionally constrains f0=E(f1∣A0)f_0=E(f_1\mid\mathcal A_0)f0​=E(f1​∣A0​); this is no restriction, since every martingale indexed from 111 extends this way. The goal asserts that X,Y,ZX,Y,ZX,Y,Z are Mathlib martingales for the same filtration as fff, and the identity fn=Xn+Yn+Znf_n=X_n+Y_n+Z_nfn​=Xn​+Yn​+Zn​ is required for n≥1n\ge1n≥1.

Further committed conventions:

  • S(f)S(f)S(f), f∗f^*f∗, Z∗Z^*Z∗, ∥⋅∥p\|\cdot\|_p∥⋅∥p​ and all expectations of nonnegative quantities take values in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞] (lower Lebesgue integral), so no infinite value is silently replaced by 000.
  • ∥X∥2=sup⁡n≥1∥Xn∥2\|X\|_2=\sup_{n\ge1}\|X_n\|_2∥X∥2​=supn≥1​∥Xn​∥2​, not the norm of a limit; Z∗=sup⁡n≥1∣Zn∣Z^*=\sup_{n\ge1}|Z_n|Z∗=supn≥1​∣Zn​∣; ∥∑k∣yk∣∥1\|\sum_k|y_k|\|_1∥∑k​∣yk​∣∥1​ is the integral of the series with y1=Y1y_1=Y_1y1​=Y1​.
  • The exit time takes values in N∪{∞}\mathbb N\cup\{\infty\}N∪{∞} and μ−1\mu-1μ−1 is truncated, with ∞−1=∞\infty-1=\infty∞−1=∞; the a.e. limit f∞f_\inftyf∞​ is a function supplied with its convergence hypothesis (Lemma 2.1) or asserted to exist (Doob's facts).
  • "Nonnegative submartingale" means fn≥0f_n\ge0fn​≥0 almost surely for n≥1n\ge1n≥1.
  • Ω\OmegaΩ is an arbitrary measurable space with a probability measure.

A formalization in which the existential could choose its own filtration, or in which the norms were Bochner integrals (which vanish on non-integrable functions), would trivialize the goal; both are excluded by the statement above.

Infrastructure needed: stopped values at unbounded stopping times and their L1L^1L1 bound; square-function identities for stopped martingales (orthogonality of martingale differences up to a stopping time); conditional-expectation compensators of predictable truncations. The definitions file is shared with the other eight missions of this series and is reusable for any work on discrete-time square and maximal functions. Proofs of the milestones, alternative arguments, and sharper constants are all welcome.

Selected references

  • D. L. Burkholder, Distribution function inequalities for martingales, The Annals of Probability 1(1), 19–42, 1973. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176997023
  • R. F. Gundy, A decomposition for L¹-bounded martingales, The Annals of Mathematical Statistics 39(1), 134–138, 1968. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177698510
  • D. G. Austin, A sample function property of martingales, The Annals of Mathematical Statistics 37(5), 1396–1397, 1966. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177699283
  • J. L. Doob, Stochastic Processes, Wiley, New York, 1953.
5 thms3 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimizationStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Optimal Starting Times for End-of-Season Sales and Optimal Stopping Times for Promotional Fares 3: With One Markdown or Markup Allowed, Thresholds x_n < z_n Give the Optimal PolicyResearch Paper

Motivation

Retailers of seasonal goods, home builders selling out a development, and airlines and cruise lines selling promotional fares all face the same operational question: inventory is fixed, the selling season is finite, and the price can be changed only rarely. Menu costs, advertising commitments and customer goodwill often restrict a seller to a single price change. The question is then when to change the price, and, if both a lower and a higher price are available, in which direction.

Feng and Gallego (Management Science 41(8), 1995) answered this for Poisson demand. Their §4 treats a single markdown (Theorem 1) and a single markup (Theorem 2). This mission formalizes their §5, the markup-or-markdown problem: the seller starts at a middle price and has one opportunity to move either down or up. The paper shows that the optimal policy is again described by time thresholds that depend only on the remaining stock, now two per stock level. The paper builds on the deterministic and fluid analysis of Gallego and van Ryzin (1994), where arbitrarily many price changes are allowed, and is the starting point of a literature on limited-price-change revenue management surveyed by Bitran and Caldentey (2003).

Setting

There are three prices p1<p<p2p_1 < p < p_2p1​<p<p2​. At price pip_ipi​ demand is a Poisson process of intensity λi\lambda_iλi​, and at ppp of intensity λ\lambdaλ, with

λ1>λ>λ2,r1>r>r2,ri=piλi, r=pλ,\lambda_1 > \lambda > \lambda_2, \qquad r_1 > r > r_2, \qquad r_i = p_i\lambda_i,\ r = p\lambda,λ1​>λ>λ2​,r1​>r>r2​,ri​=pi​λi​, r=pλ,

all prices and intensities positive. Lowering the price raises both the sales rate and the revenue rate. Salvage value is zero. Note that in this section p1p_1p1​ is the lower price; the initial price is ppp.

A seller with nnn units and time-to-go ttt sells at ppp and may switch once, to p1p_1p1​ or to p2p_2p2​. Write N(⋅)N(\cdot)N(⋅) for the demand process at ppp and Ni(⋅)N_i(\cdot)Ni​(⋅) for that at pip_ipi​.

  • Ji(n,t;s)=(p−pi)Emin⁡(n,N(s))+piEmin⁡(n,N(s)+Ni(t−s))J^i(n,t;s) = (p - p_i)E\min(n,N(s)) + p_iE\min(n, N(s) + N_i(t-s))Ji(n,t;s)=(p−pi​)Emin(n,N(s))+pi​Emin(n,N(s)+Ni​(t−s)) is the expected revenue of switching to pip_ipi​ after sss time units.
  • J(n,t;0)=max⁡{J1(n,t;0),J2(n,t;0)}J(n,t;0) = \max\{J^1(n,t;0), J^2(n,t;0)\}J(n,t;0)=max{J1(n,t;0),J2(n,t;0)} is the revenue of switching at once to the better alternative, and J(n,t;t)=pEmin⁡(n,N(t))J(n,t;t) = pE\min(n,N(t))J(n,t;t)=pEmin(n,N(t)) the revenue of never switching.
  • The optimal revenue is
J(n,t)=sup⁡τ∈TE[pmin⁡(n,N(τ))+J(n−N(τ),t−τ;0)],J(n,t) = \sup_{\tau \in \mathcal T} E\bigl[p\min(n,N(\tau)) + J(n - N(\tau), t - \tau; 0)\bigr],J(n,t)=τ∈Tsup​E[pmin(n,N(τ))+J(n−N(τ),t−τ;0)],

where T\mathcal TT is the set of stopping times of the history of NNN with 0≤τ≤t0 \le \tau \le t0≤τ≤t and N(τ)≤nN(\tau) \le nN(τ)≤n almost surely.

  • Gi(n,t)=r−ri−pi(λ−λi)P(Ni(t)≥n)G^i(n,t) = r - r_i - p_i(\lambda - \lambda_i)P(N_i(t) \ge n)Gi(n,t)=r−ri​−pi​(λ−λi​)P(Ni​(t)≥n).
  • Δi(n,t)=J(n,t;t)−Ji(n,t;0)\Delta^i(n,t) = J(n,t;t) - J^i(n,t;0)Δi(n,t)=J(n,t;t)−Ji(n,t;0) and Δ(n,t)=J1(n,t;0)−J2(n,t;0)\Delta(n,t) = J^1(n,t;0) - J^2(n,t;0)Δ(n,t)=J1(n,t;0)−J2(n,t;0), with first positive zeros tnit^i_ntni​ and tnt_ntn​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3 (pp. 1385–1386)

Under the paper's assumption tn1<tn<tn2t^1_n < t_n < t^2_ntn1​<tn​<tn2​ for every nnn, there are strictly increasing sequences (xn)(x_n)(xn​), (zn)(z_n)(zn​) with

xn<tn1<tn<tn2<znx_n < t^1_n < t_n < t^2_n < z_nxn​<tn1​<tn​<tn2​<zn​

such that J(n,t)=V(n,t)J(n,t) = V(n,t)J(n,t)=V(n,t), where V(n,t)=J(n,t;0)+F(n,t)V(n,t) = J(n,t;0) + F(n,t)V(n,t)=J(n,t;0)+F(n,t) for xn≤t≤znx_n \le t \le z_nxn​≤t≤zn​ and V(n,t)=J(n,t;0)V(n,t) = J(n,t;0)V(n,t)=J(n,t;0) otherwise. The excess F(n,⋅)F(n,\cdot)F(n,⋅) equals H1(n,⋅)H^1(n,\cdot)H1(n,⋅) on [xn,tn][x_n,t_n][xn​,tn​] and H2(n,⋅)H^2(n,\cdot)H2(n,⋅) on [tn,zn][t_n,z_n][tn​,zn​]. Each HiH^iHi solves

∂H∂t=−λH+Li(n,t),Li(n,t)=Gi(n,t)+λ[V(n−1,t)−Ji(n−1,t;0)],\frac{\partial H}{\partial t} = -\lambda H + L^i(n,t), \qquad L^i(n,t) = G^i(n,t) + \lambda\bigl[V(n-1,t) - J^i(n-1,t;0)\bigr],∂t∂H​=−λH+Li(n,t),Li(n,t)=Gi(n,t)+λ[V(n−1,t)−Ji(n−1,t;0)],

with H1(n,xn)=0H^1(n,x_n) = 0H1(n,xn​)=0 and H2(n,tn)=H1(n,tn)H^2(n,t_n) = H^1(n,t_n)H2(n,tn​)=H1(n,tn​). The thresholds are xn=inf⁡{t≥0:L1(n,t)=0}x_n = \inf\{t \ge 0 : L^1(n,t) = 0\}xn​=inf{t≥0:L1(n,t)=0} and zn=inf⁡{t≥tn:H2(n,t)≤0}z_n = \inf\{t \ge t_n : H^2(n,t) \le 0\}zn​=inf{t≥tn​:H2(n,t)≤0}.

Milestones

  1. (16), p. 1385: ∂Ji(n,t;0)/∂t=r−λ[Ji(n,t;0)−Ji(n−1,t;0)]−Gi(n,t)\partial J^i(n,t;0)/\partial t = r - \lambda[J^i(n,t;0) - J^i(n-1,t;0)] - G^i(n,t)∂Ji(n,t;0)/∂t=r−λ[Ji(n,t;0)−Ji(n−1,t;0)]−Gi(n,t).
  2. Lemma 2, p. 1379, in both cases: the zeros of G(n,⋅)G(n,\cdot)G(n,⋅) increase strictly in nnn, and G(n,⋅)G(n,\cdot)G(n,⋅) changes sign exactly once.
  3. Lemma 3, p. 1382, in both cases: J(n,t;t)−J(n,t;0)J(n,t;t) - J(n,t;0)J(n,t;t)−J(n,t;0) changes sign exactly once at a strictly increasing sequence tnt_ntn​, and is monotone beyond it.
  4. Lemma 1, p. 1378: a verification criterion identifying J(n,t)J(n,t)J(n,t) as the solution of a system of differential equations and inequalities.

Significance

Theorem 3 says that the two-directional problem has the same simple structure as the one-directional ones. With mmm units left and time-to-go uuu, the seller marks down at once when uuu falls below xmx_mxm​, marks up at once when uuu exceeds zmz_mzm​, and otherwise keeps the price. Because the thresholds increase with the stock, the policy reduces to a table of 2n2n2n numbers, which the paper computes for a housing example (Table 5). The theorem also quantifies the value of flexibility: in that example, allowing either direction adds about $1,500 over the markdown-only policy and about $7,000 over the markup-only policy.

Lemma 3 and the verification Lemma 1 are reusable beyond this mission. Lemma 3 is a sign-change property of differences of Poisson tail sums, of the kind that drives threshold results in revenue management. Lemma 1 is a sufficient condition for the value of an optimal stopping problem driven by a Poisson process. The paper's results are proved with pen and paper only; none of them has a machine-checked proof. The formalization adds a precise statement of Lemma 1, whose printed hypotheses are insufficient (see the scope section), and an explicit record of which threshold facts Theorem 3 depends on.

Difficulty

The value J(n,t)J(n,t)J(n,t) is the supremum over stopping times of a continuous-time process, and the obvious approach, dynamic programming over the stock, needs the value one stock level down. The thresholds at stock n+1n+1n+1 are defined through V(n,⋅)V(n,\cdot)V(n,⋅), so the structure must be propagated from one stock level to the next, and several properties have to propagate together. One must know that L1(n+1,⋅)L^1(n+1,\cdot)L1(n+1,⋅) again has a single sign change, which requires V(n,⋅)−J1(n,⋅;0)V(n,\cdot) - J^1(n,\cdot;0)V(n,⋅)−J1(n,⋅;0) to be increasing beyond xnx_nxn​. One must also know that H2(n+1,⋅)H^2(n+1,\cdot)H2(n+1,⋅) is positive up to tn+12t^2_{n+1}tn+12​ and eventually negative, so that zn+1z_{n+1}zn+1​ is finite, and that zn<zn+1z_n < z_{n+1}zn​<zn+1​. These facts concern three different price pairs at once: (p,p1)(p,p_1)(p,p1​), (p,p2)(p,p_2)(p,p2​) and (p1,p2)(p_1,p_2)(p1​,p2​). A direct comparison of VVV with the two one-directional value functions fails, because the optimal direction itself depends on the stock and the time-to-go. The verification step needs a pathwise fundamental theorem of calculus for the Poisson-driven process, which is where the regularity hypothesis on VVV matters.

Formalization scope

  • Model. Demand at ppp is the counting process of i.i.d. exponential interarrival times from the published definition QueueingFundamentals_Foundations_ArrivalProcess. The rate enters through the hypothesis IsExpInterarrivals P lam T, and Ni(t−s)N_i(t-s)Ni​(t−s) enters only through its law: the sum N(s)+Ni(t−s)N(s) + N_i(t-s)N(s)+Ni​(t−s) is written through its Poisson(λs+λi(t−s))(\lambda s + \lambda_i(t-s))(λs+λi​(t−s)) law. T\mathcal TT is the class of real-valued stopping times τ\tauτ of the σ-algebras generated by the counts N(u)N(u)N(u), 0≤u≤s0 \le u \le s0≤u≤s, with 0≤τ≤t0 \le \tau \le t0≤τ≤t and N(τ)≤nN(\tau) \le nN(τ)≤n almost surely.
  • Conventions. Time is time-to-go, t≥0t \ge 0t≥0; ODEs are imposed at every t>0t > 0t>0 through HasDerivAt. Threshold sequences are indexed from n=1n = 1n=1. Every infimum is a real sInf paired with the nonemptiness of its set. FFF, H1H^1H1, H2H^2H2, VVV and the thresholds are existentially quantified and tied together by the theorem's equations, so the existential determines the paper's objects. The page's assumption tn1<tn<tn2t^1_n < t_n < t^2_ntn1​<tn​<tn2​ is a hypothesis of the goal, as on the page.
  • Added hypotheses. Prices and intensities are positive, the paper's standing convention. Lemma 1 as printed is false. It is stated with the boundary condition V(n,0)=J(n,0;0)V(n,0) = J(n,0;0)V(n,0)=J(n,0;0), the zero-stock condition V(0,t)=0V(0,t) = 0V(0,t)=0, the obstacle condition V≥J(⋅;0)V \ge J(\cdot;0)V≥J(⋅;0), and local Lipschitz continuity of VVV in place of "continuous and almost everywhere differentiable". The page's proof uses all four. Lemma 2's printed "bounded" is corrected to "bounded away from zero", since yn→∞y_n \to \inftyyn​→∞.
  • No trivialization. No statement assumes the optimality identity, the verification conditions, the derivative identity (16), or any sign-change fact as a hypothesis. A goal that defined VVV and assumed J=VJ = VJ=V, or that left the thresholds unrelated to L1L^1L1 and H2H^2H2, would not be Theorem 3.
  • Infrastructure needed. Poisson tail calculus (differentiation of Emin⁡(n,N(t))E\min(n, N(t))Emin(n,N(t)) in ttt), variation-diminishing properties of the kernel e−λ(t−u)e^{-\lambda(t-u)}e−λ(t−u), linear first-order ODEs, and a martingale decomposition for Poisson counting processes evaluated at bounded stopping times. Contributions of any of these, or of proofs of the milestones, are welcome.

Selected references

  • Y. Feng and G. Gallego, Optimal Starting Times for End-of-Season Sales and Optimal Stopping Times for Promotional Fares, Management Science 41(8):1371–1391, 1995. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.41.8.1371
  • G. Gallego and G. van Ryzin, Optimal Dynamic Pricing of Inventories with Stochastic Demand over Finite Horizons, Management Science 40(8):999–1020, 1994. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.40.8.999
  • P. Brémaud, Point Processes and Queues: Martingale Dynamics, Springer, 1981. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4684-9477-8
  • S. Karlin, Total Positivity, Vol. 1, Stanford University Press, 1968.
  • G. Bitran and R. Caldentey, An Overview of Pricing Models for Revenue Management, Manufacturing & Service Operations Management 5(3):203–229, 2003. https://doi.org/10.1287/msom.5.3.203.16031
10 thms3 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimizationStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Optimal Starting Times for End-of-Season Sales and Optimal Stopping Times for Promotional Fares 2: Markup Is Optimal Once Time-to-Go Exceeds an Increasing Threshold z_nResearch Paper

Why a promotional fare needs a switching rule

An airline may offer a low promotional fare while seats remain available, then raise the fare as departure approaches. The choice is dynamic: a sale changes both the number of seats left and the benefit of waiting. The same decision appears for hotel rooms and theater seats. Feng and Gallego study a policy with two fixed prices and at most one price change, while allowing the switching time to depend on actual sales rather than a calendar date chosen in advance. Their 1995 paper proves that this adaptive problem has an inventory-dependent threshold rule. This mission isolates the markup case, in which the second price is higher than the first.

The two-price restriction has a practical role. A seller may know the fare classes it can offer while still needing to decide when to close the promotional class. The result identifies a sequence of time thresholds that can be computed for the chosen price pair. It is therefore a structural claim about an optimal policy, not a choice of numerical prices or a claim that two prices optimize over every possible price menu.

Demand, inventory, and admissible decisions

There are n≥1n\ge1n≥1 items and t≥0t\ge0t≥0 units of time-to-go. At price pip_ipi​, sales requests follow a Poisson counting process NiN_iNi​ with rate λi\lambda_iλi​. Each request sells one item while stock remains. The paper assumes that demand falls as price rises and that the lower price has the higher revenue rate. Thus the markup case has

0<p1<p2,0<λ2<λ1,p2λ2<p1λ1.0<p_1<p_2,\qquad 0<\lambda_2<\lambda_1,\qquad p_2\lambda_2<p_1\lambda_1.0<p1​<p2​,0<λ2​<λ1​,p2​λ2​<p1​λ1​.

The salvage value at the end of the horizon is zero. A fixed switch at time s∈[0,t]s\in[0,t]s∈[0,t] charges p1p_1p1​ first and p2p_2p2​ afterwards. Its expected revenue, denoted J(n,t;s)J(n,t;s)J(n,t;s), is

J(n,t;s)=(p1−p2)∑j=1nPr⁡{N1(s)≥j}+p2∑j=1nPr⁡{N1(s)+N2(t−s)≥j}.J(n,t;s)=(p_1-p_2)\sum_{j=1}^n\Pr\{N_1(s)\ge j\} +p_2\sum_{j=1}^n\Pr\{N_1(s)+N_2(t-s)\ge j\}.J(n,t;s)=(p1​−p2​)j=1∑n​Pr{N1​(s)≥j}+p2​j=1∑n​Pr{N1​(s)+N2​(t−s)≥j}.

The two counts in the last term are independent, so their sum has Poisson mean λ1s+λ2(t−s)\lambda_1s+\lambda_2(t-s)λ1​s+λ2​(t−s). This is the expression in §3 of the paper. In particular, J(n,t;0)J(n,t;0)J(n,t;0) is the revenue from increasing the price immediately.

An admissible switching time τ\tauτ uses only the history of sales at p1p_1p1​; it lies between zero and ttt and cannot wait past stock exhaustion. The optimal value J(n,t)J(n,t)J(n,t) is the supremum of expected revenue over these stopping times. The stopping decision may react to sales before the change, but it cannot anticipate future requests. This distinction matters because a deterministic switch time generally has less information than an adaptive one.

Formalization targets

The goal is Theorem 2 on pp. 1382–1383. Define the switching function

G(n,t)=p1λ1−p2λ2−p2(λ1−λ2)Pr⁡{N2(t)≥n},yn=inf⁡{u≥0:G(n,u)=0}.G(n,t)=p_1\lambda_1-p_2\lambda_2 -p_2(\lambda_1-\lambda_2)\Pr\{N_2(t)\ge n\}, \qquad y_n=\inf\{u\ge0:G(n,u)=0\}.G(n,t)=p1​λ1​−p2​λ2​−p2​(λ1​−λ2​)Pr{N2​(t)≥n},yn​=inf{u≥0:G(n,u)=0}.

There are thresholds xn,znx_n,z_nxn​,zn​ with yn≤xn<zny_n\le x_n<z_nyn​≤xn​<zn​, and (zn)n≥1(z_n)_{n\ge1}(zn​)n≥1​ is increasing. A continuation premium FFF gives the value

J(n,t)={J(n,t;0)+F(n,t),t<zn,J(n,t;0),t≥zn.J(n,t)=\begin{cases} J(n,t;0)+F(n,t),&t<z_n,\\ J(n,t;0),&t\ge z_n. \end{cases}J(n,t)={J(n,t;0)+F(n,t),J(n,t;0),​t<zn​,t≥zn​.​

For n≥1n\ge1n≥1, F(n,t)=H(n,t)F(n,t)=H(n,t)F(n,t)=H(n,t) below znz_nzn​ and is zero at or above it; F(0,t)=0F(0,t)=0F(0,t)=0. The function HHH satisfies H(n,0)=0H(n,0)=0H(n,0)=0 and the differential equation ∂tH(n,t)=−λ1H(n,t)+L(n,t)\partial_tH(n,t)=-\lambda_1H(n,t)+L(n,t)∂t​H(n,t)=−λ1​H(n,t)+L(n,t), where L(n,t)=G(n,t)+λ1F(n−1,t)L(n,t)=G(n,t)+\lambda_1F(n-1,t)L(n,t)=G(n,t)+λ1​F(n−1,t). The remaining thresholds are the first nonnegative zero of L(n,⋅)L(n,\cdot)L(n,⋅) and the first positive zero of H(n,⋅)H(n,\cdot)H(n,⋅):

xn=inf⁡{u≥0:L(n,u)=0},zn=inf⁡{u>0:H(n,u)=0}.x_n=\inf\{u\ge0:L(n,u)=0\},\qquad z_n=\inf\{u>0:H(n,u)=0\}.xn​=inf{u≥0:L(n,u)=0},zn​=inf{u>0:H(n,u)=0}.

The milestones reproduce equation (17), the markup half of Lemma 2, and Lemma 1. Together they identify the Poisson derivative identity, the sign change of GGG, and the verification criterion used to relate a candidate value to optimal stopping. The paper proves the mathematical result; the mission asks for machine-checked proofs of these formal statements.

What the result supplies

The threshold sequence tells a seller when increasing the price immediately is optimal, conditional on the stock still available. The value formula also gives the benefit of continuing at the promotional price when time-to-go lies below the threshold. The statement preserves the paper's weaker word “increasing” for znz_nzn​: it asserts monotonicity and does not require strict monotonicity of either sequence. The full theorem includes the recursive equations for FFF and HHH, so a proof of a threshold-shaped region alone would leave part of the source result unformalized.

Formalization would add a reusable optimal-stopping model built from a Poisson arrival process, a fixed-switch revenue function, and a verification lemma. The arrival process already has a published definition; the switching model and the theorem statements here are new drafts. The theorem is established in the 1995 article, while its Lean proof remains to be supplied.

Where the difficulty lies

The immediate-switch comparison G(n,t)G(n,t)G(n,t) has a single sign change, but the optimal decision also depends on revenue already earned and on the value of unsold stock after each possible sale. For n>1n>1n>1, the relevant forcing term is L(n,t)=G(n,t)+λ1F(n−1,t)L(n,t)=G(n,t)+\lambda_1F(n-1,t)L(n,t)=G(n,t)+λ1​F(n−1,t), so the sign of GGG alone does not locate the optimal switching threshold. A direct fixed-time comparison likewise does not establish optimality among stopping times that react to observed sales. These are the main obstacles the formal proof must address.

Formalization scope

The Lean model uses natural-number stock, nonnegative real time, positive real prices and rates, and an imported counting process built from independent exponential interarrival times. A rate is attached to each price. The history of the first process defines the stopping-time class; the second process enters through its Poisson law after a switch. The supremum ranges over admissible stopping times, and the payoff is bounded and measurable under the stated process law. The definition writes sales before switching as min⁡(n,N1(τ))\min(n,N_1(\tau))min(n,N1​(τ)), equal almost surely to N1(τ)N_1(\tau)N1​(τ) for admissible times. The probability-measure assumption is explicit, though the exponential interarrival law entails it.

Lean assigns a default value to an empty real infimum. The theorem explicitly asserts that each defining zero set for yny_nyn​, xnx_nxn​, and znz_nzn​ is nonempty; it also keeps u>0u>0u>0 in the definition of znz_nzn​, since H(n,0)=0H(n,0)=0H(n,0)=0. Continuity of H(n,⋅)H(n,\cdot)H(n,⋅) at zero connects its boundary value to its differential equation. Lemma 1 includes its missing initial, zero-stock, obstacle, and local-Lipschitz assumptions, all required by its printed proof. The paper's word “bounded” in Lemma 2 is retained in the milestone quotation but replaced by the positive lower bound it uses; yny_nyn​ is unbounded as stock grows. These choices are recorded for review in the moderation notes.

The goal derives optimality from the demand and price assumptions. It does not assume the verification conditions, the sign change, or the revenue identity as premises. Contributions to the Poisson tail calculus, stopping-time measurability and boundedness, threshold zero sets, and verification argument are within scope and can be reused in related finite-inventory pricing models.

Selected references

  • Y. Feng and G. Gallego, Optimal Starting Times for End-of-Season Sales and Optimal Stopping Times for Promotional Fares, Management Science 41(8), 1995, pp. 1371–1391. DOI: 10.1287/mnsc.41.8.1371.
6 thms3 active usersReviewed
Convex OptimizationInformation TheoryOptimization+1·Captain: mikedeng1

I-Divergence Geometry of Probability Distributions and Minimization Problems 2: Under Moment Constraints the I-Projection Exists at Every Interior Point and Has Exponential-Family DensityResearch Paper

Minimum discrimination information under moment constraints

Given a reference probability distribution RRR and a set E\mathcal EE of probability distributions, the minimum discrimination information problem asks for the member of E\mathcal EE closest to RRR in Kullback–Leibler divergence. It is the basis of Kullback's information-theoretic approach to statistics (Kullback 1959), of the maximum-entropy principle of statistical physics (Jaynes 1957), and of large-deviation theory, where Sanov's theorem identifies the rate function of an empirical distribution with exactly this minimum. The most common constraint sets are defined by prescribed expectations ∫fi dP=ai\int f_i\,dP = a_i∫fi​dP=ai​, and the classical answer is that the minimizer is an exponential family member, with density cexp⁡∑itific\exp\sum_i t_i f_icexp∑i​ti​fi​ with respect to RRR.

That answer was usually justified by Lagrange multipliers, which presuppose that a minimizer exists. Csiszár's paper (Ann. Probab. 1975) treats the problem geometrically, with I-divergence in the role of squared Euclidean distance, and its last result, Theorem 3.3, proves existence and the exponential form at once for unbounded constraint functions, under a hypothesis on the exponential moments of the fif_ifi​.

Timeline:

  • 1959: Kullback formulates the minimum discrimination information theorem: an element of E\mathcal EE of exponential form is the minimizer (a sufficient condition).
  • 1966: Kullback and Khairat (Ann. Math. Statist. 37, 1966) refine the sufficient condition.
  • 1972: Čencov proves existence of exponential-form minimizers under general conditions (Statistical Decision Rules and Optimal Inference, Theorem 23.1).
  • 1975: Csiszár proves Theorem 3.3 by the minimizing-sequence method of his Theorem 2.1; a first version of the paper assumed TR=EkT_R = E^kTR​=Ek, weakened to "TRT_RTR​ open" after Čencov's work.

Setting

All distributions (PD's) live on one measurable space (X,X)(X,\mathcal X)(X,X). The I-divergence of PPP from QQQ is

I(P∥Q)=∫log⁡pQ dP  if P≪Q,I(P∥Q)=+∞  otherwise,I(P\|Q)=\int \log p_Q\,dP\ \text{ if } P\ll Q,\qquad I(P\|Q)=+\infty\ \text{ otherwise},I(P∥Q)=∫logpQ​dP  if P≪Q,I(P∥Q)=+∞  otherwise,

where pQp_QpQ​ is the density of PPP with respect to QQQ; it takes values in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞] and vanishes only for P=QP=QP=Q. The variation distance is ∣P−Q∣=∫∣pR−qR∣ dR|P-Q|=\int|p_R-q_R|\,dR∣P−Q∣=∫∣pR​−qR​∣dR for any PD RRR dominating both. If E\mathcal EE is a convex set of PD's containing some PPP with I(P∥R)<∞I(P\|R)<\inftyI(P∥R)<∞, a Q∈EQ\in\mathcal EQ∈E with

I(Q∥R)=min⁡P∈EI(P∥R)I(Q\|R)=\min_{P\in\mathcal E} I(P\|R)I(Q∥R)=P∈Emin​I(P∥R)

is the I-projection of RRR on E\mathcal EE.

Fix real-valued measurable functions f1,…,fkf_1,\dots,f_kf1​,…,fk​ on XXX. For a=(a1,…,ak)∈Eka=(a_1,\dots,a_k)\in E^ka=(a1​,…,ak​)∈Ek (Euclidean kkk-space) the moment set E(a)\mathcal E(a)E(a) is the set of PD's PPP with ∫fi dP=ai\int f_i\,dP=a_i∫fi​dP=ai​, i=1,…,ki=1,\dots,ki=1,…,k. Further:

  • ARA_RAR​ is the set of a∈Eka\in E^ka∈Ek for which E(a)\mathcal E(a)E(a) contains some PPP with I(P∥R)<∞I(P\|R)<\inftyI(P∥R)<∞;
  • TR={t∈Ek: exp⁡∑itifi is R-integrable}T_R=\{t\in E^k:\ \exp\sum_i t_i f_i \text{ is } R\text{-integrable}\}TR​={t∈Ek: exp∑i​ti​fi​ is R-integrable}, (3.16);
  • F(a)=inf⁡P∈E(a)I(P∥R)F(a)=\inf_{P\in\mathcal E(a)} I(P\|R)F(a)=infP∈E(a)​I(P∥R), (3.18), the optimal value as a function of the constraint levels.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.3

If TRT_RTR​ is open in EkE^kEk, then for every point aaa of the interior of ARA_RAR​ the I-projection QQQ of RRR on E(a)\mathcal E(a)E(a) exists and

qR(x)=cexp⁡∑i=1ktifi(x)R-a.e.,q_R(x)=c\exp\sum_{i=1}^k t_i f_i(x)\qquad R\text{-a.e.},qR​(x)=cexpi=1∑k​ti​fi​(x)R-a.e.,

for some constant ccc and some t∈Ekt\in E^kt∈Ek.

Milestones

  1. (2.2), the parallelogram identity: I(Pm∥R)+I(Pn∥R)=2I(Pm+Pn2∥R)+I(Pm∥Pm+Pn2)+I(Pn∥Pm+Pn2)I(P_m\|R)+I(P_n\|R)=2I(\tfrac{P_m+P_n}2\|R)+I(P_m\|\tfrac{P_m+P_n}2)+I(P_n\|\tfrac{P_m+P_n}2)I(Pm​∥R)+I(Pn​∥R)=2I(2Pm​+Pn​​∥R)+I(Pm​∥2Pm​+Pn​​)+I(Pn​∥2Pm​+Pn​​).
  2. (2.4): a minimizing sequence PnP_nPn​ in a convex set converges in variation to a PD Q≪RQ\ll RQ≪R (closedness of the set is not used).
  3. Lemma 3.1: if etfe^{tf}etf is QQQ-integrable for small ∣t∣|t|∣t∣, then I(Pn∥Q)→0I(P_n\|Q)\to0I(Pn​∥Q)→0 implies ∫f dPn→∫f dQ\int f\,dP_n\to\int f\,dQ∫fdPn​→∫fdQ.
  4. (3.18): ARA_RAR​ is convex and FFF is finite and convex on ARA_RAR​.
  5. (3.19): at an interior point aaa of ARA_RAR​ there is ttt with F(b)≥F(a)+∑iti(bi−ai)F(b)\ge F(a)+\sum_i t_i(b_i-a_i)F(b)≥F(a)+∑i​ti​(bi​−ai​) for all b∈ARb\in A_Rb∈AR​.
  6. Remark, p. 158: FFF is differentiable at interior points of ARA_RAR​, and grad⁡F(a)=t\operatorname{grad}F(a)=tgradF(a)=t, the parameter vector of the I-projection.

Significance

Theorem 3.3 gives existence of maximum-entropy (minimum discrimination information) distributions under finitely many moment constraints with unbounded constraint functions, which covers the usual exponential families of statistics (normal, gamma, Poisson moment constraints) where boundedness fails. It identifies the minimizer's form without assuming a minimizer exists, and the Remark identifies the natural parameters as the gradient of the optimal value, the sensitivity interpretation of Lagrange multipliers. These facts underlie the duality between moment and natural parameters of exponential families and the rate functions of Cramér and Sanov type.

The result is proved, in this paper and (under a slightly weaker hypothesis) by Čencov. None of it is formalized: Mathlib has the Kullback–Leibler divergence of measures (InformationTheory.klDiv) and tilted measures, but no I-projection, no existence theorem for constrained minimizers of KL divergence and no exponential-form characterization. The mission produces a machine-checked version of the existence and form theorem, together with the general steps it uses (the parallelogram identity, convergence of minimizing sequences in variation, continuity of exponential-moment expectations under KL convergence).

Difficulty

The obvious argument fails at the first step: the moment set E(a)\mathcal E(a)E(a) is convex but not closed in variation when the fif_ifi​ are unbounded, since ∫fi dP\int f_i\,dP∫fi​dP is not continuous in variation. A minimizing sequence therefore converges in variation to some QQQ (as in Theorem 2.1), but nothing places QQQ in E(a)\mathcal E(a)E(a): mass can escape to where ∣fi∣|f_i|∣fi​∣ is large. Ruling this out needs quantitative control of I(Pn∥Q)I(P_n\|Q)I(Pn​∥Q), which in turn requires knowing the form of QQQ before knowing QQQ is feasible; the interplay with the convexity of FFF and the openness of TRT_RTR​ is where the work lies. A Lagrange-multiplier argument is not available: it presupposes a minimizer and differentiability that are part of the conclusion.

Formalization scope

  • Probability distributions are Measure X with IsProbabilityMeasure; the I-divergence is Mathlib's klDiv : ℝ≥0∞, which for probability measures equals (1.1) with the conventions log⁡0=−∞\log 0=-\inftylog0=−∞, log⁡a0=+∞\log\frac a0=+\inftylog0a​=+∞, 0⋅(±∞)=00\cdot(\pm\infty)=00⋅(±∞)=0.
  • The variation distance uses P+QP+QP+Q as dominating measure (the page allows any dominating PD; the value is the same).
  • The I-projection carries I(Q∥R)<∞I(Q\|R)<\inftyI(Q∥R)<∞ explicitly: the page defines it only when E\mathcal EE meets {P:I(P∥R)<∞}\{P: I(P\|R)<\infty\}{P:I(P∥R)<∞}.
  • E(a)\mathcal E(a)E(a) requires PPP-integrability of every fif_ifi​, so the constraint integrals are genuine. EkE^kEk is Fin k → ℝ with its product (Euclidean) topology; "inner point" is the topological interior. k=0k=0k=0 is allowed.
  • FFF is an infimum in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞] (equal to ∞\infty∞ outside ARA_RAR​); statements use its real value only on ARA_RAR​, where it is finite. (3.18) prints I(P∥Q)I(P\|Q)I(P∥Q); the reference measure is RRR, as the definition of ARA_RAR​ and the proof show. (3.16) prints (t1,…,tn)(t_1,\dots,t_n)(t1​,…,tn​) for (t1,…,tk)(t_1,\dots,t_k)(t1​,…,tk​).
  • Densities are Radon–Nikodym derivatives and the form (3.2) is an RRR-almost-everywhere identity with no exceptional set of positive measure.
  • Lemma 3.1 asserts that fff is PnP_nPn​-integrable for large nnn as well as the convergence, so that ∫f dPn\int f\,dP_n∫fdPn​ is not a default value.
  • Trivializing readings are excluded: the goal asserts existence of the I-projection rather than assuming it, TRT_RTR​ is an integrability set (not a set where a junk integral is finite), and the infimum is never a real sInf over a possibly empty set.

A complete development needs: Radon–Nikodym calculus for klDiv (the identity (2.6) I(P∥R)−I(P∥Q)=∫log⁡qR dPI(P\|R)-I(P\|Q)=\int\log q_R\,dPI(P∥R)−I(P∥Q)=∫logqR​dP), Pinsker's inequality (available on the platform as a reference item), lower semicontinuity of klDiv under convergence in variation, completeness of the space of PD's in variation, and supporting hyperplanes of finite-dimensional convex functions. The KL parallelogram identity, Lemma 3.1 and the variation-distance facts are reusable well beyond this mission. Contributions on any milestone, and on these infrastructure lemmas, are welcome.

Selected references

  • I. Csiszár, I-divergence geometry of probability distributions and minimization problems, Ann. Probab. 3(1), 146–158, 1975. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176996454
  • S. Kullback, Information Theory and Statistics, Wiley, 1959.
  • S. Kullback and M. A. Khairat, A note on minimum discrimination information, Ann. Math. Statist. 37, 279–280, 1966.
  • E. T. Jaynes, Information theory and statistical mechanics, Phys. Rev. 106, 620–630, 1957. https://doi.org/10.1103/PhysRev.106.620
  • N. N. Čencov, Statistical Decision Rules and Optimal Inference (Russian), Nauka, 1972; English translation, American Mathematical Society, 1982.
  • I. N. Sanov, On the probability of large deviations of random variables (Russian), Mat. Sbornik 42, 11–44, 1957.
10 thms3 active usersReviewed
Complexity TheoryQuantum InformationTheoretical Computer Science·Captain: mikedeng1

Strengths and Weaknesses of Quantum Computing I: Relative to a Random Oracle, a Quantum Algorithm Needs Ω(2^{n/2}) Queries to Decide Whether 1ⁿ Has a PreimageResearch Paper

Motivation

Grover's algorithm (Grover 1996) finds a marked item among NNN with O(N)O(\sqrt N)O(N​) queries, a quadratic speed-up over any classical algorithm. Whether quantum computers can do substantially better on search, and so solve NP-type problems by brute force in polynomial time, was settled in the negative by Bennett, Bernstein, Brassard and Vazirani (arXiv:quant-ph/9701001, SIAM J. Comput. 26(5), 1997): relative to a random oracle, a quantum algorithm needs Ω(2n/2)\Omega(2^{n/2})Ω(2n/2) queries to decide whether a string has a preimage. The bound matches Grover's algorithm up to a constant factor, and its hybrid argument is one of the two standard lower-bound methods of the field, together with the polynomial method (Beals et al. 1998) and the adversary method (Ambainis 2000).

Timeline:

  • 1996: Grover's algorithm searches NNN items with O(N)O(\sqrt N)O(N​) queries.
  • 1997: the paper proves BQTime(o(2n/2))⊉NP\mathbf{BQTime}(o(2^{n/2})) \not\supseteq \mathbf{NP}BQTime(o(2n/2))⊇NP relative to a random oracle with probability 1 (Theorem 3.5), and the Ω(2n/3)\Omega(2^{n/3})Ω(2n/3) bound for random permutations (Theorem 3.6).
  • 1998: Boyer, Brassard, Høyer and Tapp give tight bounds for quantum searching.
  • 1999: Zalka shows Grover's algorithm is exactly optimal.

Setting

A TTT-query algorithm acts on vectors φ∈C(X∪{⊥})×R×W\varphi \in \mathbb{C}^{(X \cup \{\bot\}) \times R \times W}φ∈C(X∪{⊥})×R×W, where XXX is the set of query strings, RRR the set of answers (an additive group) and WWW a finite workspace. A basis configuration (x,z,w)(x, z, w)(x,z,w) with x∈Xx \in Xx∈X is querying xxx; (⊥,z,w)(\bot, z, w)(⊥,z,w) is not querying. For an oracle f:X→Rf : X \to Rf:X→R the oracle operator is

Of ∣x,z,w⟩=∣x,z+f(x),w⟩,Of ∣⊥,z,w⟩=∣⊥,z,w⟩.O_f\,|x, z, w\rangle = |x, z + f(x), w\rangle, \qquad O_f\,|\bot, z, w\rangle = |\bot, z, w\rangle .Of​∣x,z,w⟩=∣x,z+f(x),w⟩,Of​∣⊥,z,w⟩=∣⊥,z,w⟩.

The algorithm consists of a unit vector φ0\varphi_0φ0​, unitaries U0,…,UT−1U_0, \dots, U_{T-1}U0​,…,UT−1​ that do not depend on the oracle, and a set of accepting configurations. With oracle AAA its states are φi+1=UiOAφi\varphi_{i+1} = U_i O_A \varphi_iφi+1​=Ui​OA​φi​; the acceptance probability is the squared norm of the accepting part of φT\varphi_TφT​. The query magnitude of yyy in φ\varphiφ is qy(φ)=∑z,w∣φ(y,z,w)∣2q_y(\varphi) = \sum_{z, w} |\varphi(y, z, w)|^2qy​(φ)=∑z,w​∣φ(y,z,w)∣2 (Definition 3.2). The algorithm decides a property if it accepts with probability at least 2/32/32/3 when the property holds and at most 1/31/31/3 when it fails.

In the main theorem X=R={0,1}nX = R = \{0,1\}^nX=R={0,1}n with bitwise addition, and the oracle is a uniformly random function A:{0,1}n→{0,1}nA : \{0,1\}^n \to \{0,1\}^nA:{0,1}n→{0,1}n. The question is whether 1n1^n1n belongs to LA={y:∃x A(x)=y}\mathcal{L}_A = \{y : \exists x\ A(x) = y\}LA​={y:∃x A(x)=y}.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.5 (finite form)

∃ c>0 ∃N ∀n≥N ∀M with T≤c 2n/2 queries:Pr⁡A[MA fails to decide ∃x A(x)=1n]≥18.\exists\, c > 0\ \exists N\ \forall n \ge N\ \forall M \text{ with } T \le c\, 2^{n/2} \text{ queries}: \quad \Pr_A\bigl[M^A \text{ fails to decide } \exists x\ A(x) = 1^n\bigr] \ge \tfrac18 .∃c>0 ∃N ∀n≥N ∀M with T≤c2n/2 queries:APr​[MA fails to decide ∃x A(x)=1n]≥81​.

The constant is existential, matching the theorem's hypothesis T(n)=o(2n/2)T(n) = o(2^{n/2})T(n)=o(2n/2); ccc and NNN do not depend on the workspace or the algorithm.

Milestones

  1. Theorem 3.1: unit vectors at distance ε\varepsilonε have measurement distributions within total variation 4ε4\varepsilon4ε.
  2. Theorem 3.3 (corrected): changing oracle answers on time–string pairs of total query magnitude ≤ε2/T\le \varepsilon^2/T≤ε2/T moves the final state by at most 2ε2\varepsilon2ε.
  3. Corollary 3.4 (corrected): outside a set of at most 4T2/ε24T^2/\varepsilon^24T2/ε2 strings, changing the oracle at one string moves the final state by at most ε\varepsilonε.
  4. Pr⁡[1n has no preimage]=((2n−1)/2n)2n≥1/4\Pr[1^n \text{ has no preimage}] = ((2^n-1)/2^n)^{2^n} \ge 1/4Pr[1n has no preimage]=((2n−1)/2n)2n≥1/4.
  5. Pr⁡[1n has a unique preimage]=((2n−1)/2n)2n−1≥1/e\Pr[1^n \text{ has a unique preimage}] = ((2^n-1)/2^n)^{2^n-1} \ge 1/ePr[1n has a unique preimage]=((2n−1)/2n)2n−1≥1/e.
  6. Final states within 1/131/131/13 for AAA and AyA_yAy​ force failure on one of them.
  7. The double counting: failing oracles with a unique preimage are at least half the successful oracles with none.

Significance

The theorem shows that the quadratic speed-up of Grover's algorithm cannot be improved for unstructured search, and that relative to a random oracle NP⊈BQP\mathbf{NP} \not\subseteq \mathbf{BQP}NP⊆BQP; any quantum algorithm for NP-complete problems must use the structure of the problem. Theorem 3.3 and Corollary 3.4 isolate the constraint unitary evolution places on "quantum parallelism" and are reused across quantum lower bounds, including the permutation bound of the companion mission (Theorem 3.6).

The results are proved on paper and, to our knowledge, have no machine-checked proof. The mission produces a formal query model with an XOR oracle, a formal hybrid argument, and the lower bound with its constants checked. Two printed bounds are wrong by constant factors (below); the formal statements carry the corrected constants, and a formal proof settles them. Grover's matching upper bound is on the platform as Grover.search_succeeds_bounded, for a phase oracle and one fixed algorithm.

Difficulty

The obvious argument — each query reveals one bit about where the preimage is, so Ω(2n)\Omega(2^n)Ω(2n) queries are needed — fails for quantum algorithms, which query all strings in superposition at once. The difficulty is to bound how much a superposition of queries can learn, which requires controlling the accumulated effect of small changes across TTT unitary steps, and then converting a bound on states into a statement about the probability of failure over random oracles, where the set of sensitive strings depends on the oracle.

Formalization scope

The paper's oracle quantum Turing machines are replaced by the query model above, the model its proofs use. Every oracle QTM running TTT steps is a TTT-query algorithm: oracle answers on lengths other than nnn are fixed and absorbed into the unitaries, as the proof fixes them, and the input 1n1^n1n is absorbed into φ0\varphi_0φ0​. Queries return the full value A(x)∈{0,1}nA(x) \in \{0,1\}^nA(x)∈{0,1}n; one Boolean query is two full-value queries, so the goal implies the Boolean-oracle bound with ccc halved. Strings are Fin n → ZMod 2; states are EuclideanSpace ℂ (Option X × R × W); probabilities over oracles are counting fractions over all (2n)2n(2^n)^{2^n}(2n)2n functions; total variation distance is the paper's ∑x∣D(x)−D′(x)∣\sum_x |\mathcal D(x) - \mathcal D'(x)|∑x​∣D(x)−D′(x)∣ without the factor 1/21/21/2.

Corrections: Theorem 3.3 is printed with conclusion ≤ε\le \varepsilon≤ε, which fails (one query string, T=1T = 1T=1, distance 222 at ε=1\varepsilon = 1ε=1; machine-checked); the true bound is 2ε2\varepsilon2ε. Corollary 3.4 is printed with ∣S∣≤2T2/ε2|S| \le 2T^2/\varepsilon^2∣S∣≤2T2/ε2, which fails (16 strings, T=1T = 1T=1, ε=0.45\varepsilon = 0.45ε=0.45); the true bound is 4T2/ε24T^2/\varepsilon^24T2/ε2. The printed constant T(n)≤2n/2/20T(n) \le 2^{n/2}/20T(n)≤2n/2/20 in the proof of Theorem 3.5 does not support the step 2n−card(S)≥2n−12^n - \mathrm{card}(S) \ge 2^{n-1}2n−card(S)≥2n−1 even with the paper's own count; the goal states an existential constant, and c=1/37c = 1/37c=1/37 works with the corrected Corollary 3.4. The closing probability-111 argument over countably many machines and the class statement about BQTime\mathbf{BQTime}BQTime are not formalized.

A formalization in which algorithms query at every step on every branch (no ⊥\bot⊥ sector), only one side of the bounded-error condition is tested, or the probability is taken over a set of oracles that excludes the hard instances, proves a weaker theorem and is ruled out by these definitions.

Needed infrastructure: norms of finite-dimensional complex vectors, unitaries as linear isometry equivalences, finite counting of functions. The query model and the hybrid argument are reusable for any quantum query lower bound.

Selected references

  • C. H. Bennett, E. Bernstein, G. Brassard, U. Vazirani, Strengths and weaknesses of quantum computing, SIAM J. Comput. 26(5):1510–1523, 1997. arXiv:quant-ph/9701001
  • L. K. Grover, A fast quantum mechanical algorithm for database search, STOC 1996. arXiv:quant-ph/9605043
  • M. Boyer, G. Brassard, P. Høyer, A. Tapp, Tight bounds on quantum searching, Fortschr. Phys. 46, 1998. arXiv:quant-ph/9605034
  • C. Zalka, Grover's quantum searching algorithm is optimal, Phys. Rev. A 60, 1999. arXiv:quant-ph/9711070
  • R. Beals, H. Buhrman, R. Cleve, M. Mosca, R. de Wolf, Quantum lower bounds by polynomials, J. ACM 48, 2001. arXiv:quant-ph/9802049
  • A. Ambainis, Quantum lower bounds by quantum arguments, J. Comput. Syst. Sci. 64, 2002. arXiv:quant-ph/0002066
9 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Inventory Control and Price Theory 2: For Style Goods with Uniform Demand Linear in Unit Profit, Expected Profit Is Maximized at P* = ((P₀ − 3L) + √((3L − P₀)² + 16P₀L))/4Research Paper

Pricing and stocking a perishable good

A retailer of style goods — seasonal clothing, newspapers, anything that loses most of its value when the selling period ends — must decide before the season how many units to stock, knowing demand only as a probability distribution. Units left over are liquidated at a loss; units short are sales forgone. This single-period trade-off is the newsvendor problem, and its solution, the critical-fractile rule, is one of the first results of stochastic inventory theory.

In practice the retailer also sets the price, and the price moves the demand distribution. T. M. Whitin's 1955 paper Inventory Control and Price Theory (DOI 10.1287/mnsc.2.1.61) is one of the first to put the two decisions into one model. Its Section 3 restates the critical fractile for a given price, then lets the demand distribution depend on the unit profit and asks for the unit profit and stock that jointly maximize expected profit. For one explicit family of demand laws it solves the problem in closed form. This joint price-setting newsvendor problem later grew into a large literature (Mills 1959, Karlin and Carr 1962, and the survey of Petruzzi and Dada 1999), which cites Whitin's model as its starting point.

Setting

There is one selling period. Stock x≥0x \ge 0x≥0 is on hand at its start. Each unit sold earns the unit profit PPP; each unit left over at the close is liquidated at the unit liquidation loss L>0L > 0L>0.

Demand depends on the unit profit through its mean. The mean demand is the linear function

μ(P)=k (P−P0),\mu(P) = k\,(P - P_0),μ(P)=k(P−P0​),

where P0>0P_0 > 0P0​>0 is the unit profit at which demand falls to zero and kkk is the reciprocal of the slope of the line relating unit profit and amount demanded. Demand decreases in PPP, so k<0k < 0k<0, and the admissible unit profits are 0<P<P00 < P < P_00<P<P0​. At unit profit PPP, demand XXX has the rectangular (uniform) distribution on [0,2μ(P)][0, 2\mu(P)][0,2μ(P)].

The expected marginal profit of the xxx-th unit is f(x)=P Pr⁡(X≥x)f(x) = P\,\Pr(X \ge x)f(x)=PPr(X≥x), the probability that it sells weighted by the unit profit, and the expected marginal loss is g(x)=L Pr⁡(X<x)g(x) = L\,\Pr(X < x)g(x)=LPr(X<x), the probability that it does not sell weighted by the liquidation loss. The expected profit of stocking xxx units at unit profit PPP is the area between them,

E(P,x)=∫0x[f(t)−g(t)] dt,E(P, x) = \int_0^x \big[f(t) - g(t)\big]\,dt,E(P,x)=∫0x​[f(t)−g(t)]dt,

which is the expected profit on sales minus the expected liquidation loss. The equilibrium stock is

xM(P)=−2kP(P0−P)P+L.x_M(P) = -\frac{2kP(P_0 - P)}{P + L}.xM​(P)=−P+L2kP(P0​−P)​.

Formalization targets

Goal: the optimal unit profit (Eq. (16))

With

P∗=(P0−3L)+(3L−P0)2+16P0L4,P^* = \frac{(P_0 - 3L) + \sqrt{(3L - P_0)^2 + 16P_0L}}{4},P∗=4(P0​−3L)+(3L−P0​)2+16P0​L​​,

one has 0<P∗<P00 < P^* < P_00<P∗<P0​, and for all 0<P<P00 < P < P_00<P<P0​ and all x≥0x \ge 0x≥0

E(P,x)≤E(P∗,xM(P∗)),E(P, x) \le E\big(P^*, x_M(P^*)\big),E(P,x)≤E(P∗,xM​(P∗)),

with equality only at (P,x)=(P∗,xM(P∗))(P, x) = (P^*, x_M(P^*))(P,x)=(P∗,xM​(P∗)). The formula for P∗P^*P∗ involves only P0P_0P0​ and LLL: the optimal unit profit is independent of the demand slope kkk.

Milestones, in the order of the paper

  1. Eq. (8) — for a general demand law, profit is maximized at the stock whose probability of being sold is L/(G+P+L)L/(G + P + L)L/(G+P+L) (GGG a goodwill loss per unit short). This is already proved on the platform as SupplyChainTheory.chain_optimal_fractile and enters as a reference.
  2. Eq. (11) — on 0≤x≤2μ(P)0 \le x \le 2\mu(P)0≤x≤2μ(P), f(x)=P2k(P0−P)x+Pf(x) = \frac{P}{2k(P_0 - P)}x + Pf(x)=2k(P0​−P)P​x+P and g(x)=−L2k(P0−P)xg(x) = \frac{-L}{2k(P_0 - P)}xg(x)=2k(P0​−P)−L​x.
  3. Eqs. (10), (13) — on the same range, E(P,x)=P+L4k(P0−P)x2+PxE(P, x) = \frac{P + L}{4k(P_0 - P)}x^2 + PxE(P,x)=4k(P0​−P)P+L​x2+Px.
  4. Eqs. (9), (12) — xM(P)x_M(P)xM​(P) lies in (0,2μ(P))(0, 2\mu(P))(0,2μ(P)), is the only stock with f=gf = gf=g, and is the unique maximizer of E(P,⋅)E(P, \cdot)E(P,⋅) over x≥0x \ge 0x≥0.
  5. Eq. (14) — E(P,xM(P))=−kP2(P0−P)/(P+L)E(P, x_M(P)) = -kP^2(P_0 - P)/(P + L)E(P,xM​(P))=−kP2(P0​−P)/(P+L).
  6. Eq. (15) — the derivative of P↦E(P,xM(P))P \mapsto E(P, x_M(P))P↦E(P,xM​(P)) vanishes exactly when 2P2+(3L−P0)P−2P0L=02P^2 + (3L - P_0)P - 2P_0L = 02P2+(3L−P0​)P−2P0​L=0.
  7. Footnote 7 — the elasticity of mean demand at P∗P^*P∗ equals P∗/(P0−P∗)P^*/(P_0 - P^*)P∗/(P0​−P∗), and it tends to 111 as P0→∞P_0 \to \inftyP0​→∞ with LLL fixed.

Significance

The goal is a complete closed-form solution of a joint pricing-and-stocking problem under uncertainty: one price and one stock level, explicitly, with a proof that no other pair does as well. The independence of the optimal unit profit from kkk says that, in this family, the scale of the market does not affect the optimal margin; only the ratio of the zero-demand margin to the liquidation loss does. Footnote 7 relates the optimum to the classical monopoly rule (unit elasticity) in the limit of a negligible liquidation loss.

Whitin's derivation is calculus on closed forms and was never stated as a theorem with hypotheses. He calls the stationary point of (15) "the optimal PPP" without checking that it is a maximum, that it is global, or that the stock beyond the support of demand cannot do better. The formalization fixes all three: the goal is a statement of global, unique optimality over the whole admissible region. No machine-checked proof of this result, of the price-setting newsvendor, or of the uniform-demand newsvendor exists on the platform; the general critical-fractile rule (8) is the only part of Section 3 already proved there.

Difficulty

The expected profit is defined from the demand law, so the closed forms (11) and (13) must be derived from the uniform distribution — probabilities of half-lines under a conditioned Lebesgue measure, and an interval integral of the resulting piecewise-linear functions. They hold only on the support of demand; beyond 2μ(P)2\mu(P)2μ(P) the marginal profit is 000 and the marginal loss is LLL, and the global statement must cover that region too.

The pricing step is where the paper is loose. Setting the derivative of (14) to zero gives a quadratic with two real roots, and a stationary point of a function on an open interval need not be its maximum. The goal asks for the global maximum over 0<P<P00 < P < P_00<P<P0​ and its uniqueness, and asks that it be the global maximum of the joint problem, not only of the reduced function P↦E(P,xM(P))P \mapsto E(P, x_M(P))P↦E(P,xM​(P)).

Formalization scope

All quantities are real numbers; stock is continuous, as in the paper's calculus. Mean demand is meanDemand k P₀ P = k * (P - P₀) and the paper's sign convention is kept: k<0k < 0k<0 is a hypothesis of every statement, as are L>0L > 0L>0 and 0<P<P00 < P < P_00<P<P0​ (or P0>0P_0 > 0P0​>0 where PPP is not fixed). The demand law is ProbabilityTheory.cond volume (Set.Icc 0 (2 * μ)); fff and ggg use Pr⁡(X≥x)\Pr(X \ge x)Pr(X≥x) and Pr⁡(X<x)\Pr(X < x)Pr(X<x); EEE is an interval integral defined for every xxx.

The paper's loose phrases are read as follows. "Equation (9) may be solved for xxx" becomes uniqueness of the root of f−gf - gf−g on x≥0x \ge 0x≥0; "the equilibrium value of xxx" becomes the unique maximizer of E(P,⋅)E(P, \cdot)E(P,⋅) over x≥0x \ge 0x≥0; "differentiating (14)" becomes a HasDerivAt statement with the explicit derivative for P↦E(P,xM(P))P \mapsto E(P, x_M(P))P↦E(P,xM​(P)), together with the equivalence with (15); "solving (15) gives the optimal PPP" becomes the goal's joint global maximum with equality case; "independent of kkk" is the shape of the formula for P∗P^*P∗; "as P0P_0P0​ becomes large relative to LLL, the optimal elasticity approaches unity" becomes a limit as P0→∞P_0 \to \inftyP0​→∞ with LLL fixed.

Defining EEE by the closed form (13) instead of from the demand law would make milestones (11) and (13) tautologies and would change the model beyond the support of demand; this formalization rules that out. The paper's goodwill loss GGG belongs to the fixed-price model of (8) and does not appear in EEE.

A complete development needs the uniform distribution's tail probabilities, interval integrals of piecewise-linear functions, and one-variable calculus for the quadratic and the cubic P2(P0−P)/(P+L)P^2(P_0 - P)/(P + L)P2(P0​−P)/(P+L); the uniform-law lemmas are reusable for any newsvendor problem with uniform demand. Proofs of the milestones, and alternative arguments for the goal, are welcome.

Selected references

  • T. M. Whitin, Inventory Control and Price Theory, Management Science 2(1), 61–68, 1955. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.2.1.61
  • E. S. Mills, Uncertainty and Price Theory, Quarterly Journal of Economics 73(1), 116–130, 1959. https://doi.org/10.2307/1883828
  • S. Karlin and C. R. Carr, Prices and Optimal Inventory Policy, in Arrow, Karlin and Scarf (eds.), Studies in Applied Probability and Management Science, Stanford University Press, 159–172, 1962.
  • N. C. Petruzzi and M. Dada, Pricing and the Newsvendor Problem: A Review with Extensions, Operations Research 47(2), 183–194, 1999. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.47.2.183
  • L. V. Snyder and Z.-J. M. Shen, Fundamentals of Supply Chain Theory, 2nd ed., Wiley, 2019, Eq. (14.8) (the critical fractile, formalized on the platform as SupplyChainTheory.chain_optimal_fractile).
9 thms3 active usersReviewed
Computational GeometryOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Concentration of Measure and Isoperimetric Inequalities in Product Spaces XII: The Euclidean Traveling Salesman Problem — P(|L_N − M| ≥ t) ≤ K e^{−t²/K} for N Uniform Points in the SquareTextbook

Motivation

The Euclidean traveling salesman problem asks for the shortest closed route through a finite set of points in the plane. Even when the points are placed independently and uniformly in a square, finding an individual shortest route is computationally difficult. A separate probabilistic question is whether the optimal length varies much from one random sample to another. In Chapter 11 of Talagrand's 1995 paper, this question motivates a concentration theorem for the tour length and for other geometric functionals with the same local regularity property.

The result is useful because a bound on fluctuations can be applied without computing the distribution of the optimal tour length. It separates the typical size of the length, which may need other geometric estimates, from the chance of a substantial deviation. The paper develops a more general concentration method for product spaces; the geometric chapter shows how its estimates can control an optimization problem whose response to changing one sample point depends strongly on the local configuration.

Setting

Let Q=[0,1]2Q=[0,1]^2Q=[0,1]2, and let X1,…,XNX_1,\ldots,X_NX1​,…,XN​ be independent points uniformly distributed in QQQ, with N≥1N\ge1N≥1. A configuration is the finite set F={X1,…,XN}F=\{X_1,\ldots,X_N\}F={X1​,…,XN​}; repeated sample locations are represented once in FFF. For any finite F⊆QF\subseteq QF⊆Q, write T(F)T(F)T(F) for the length of a shortest closed tour visiting every point of FFF. The tour length of the random sample is TN=T(F)T_N=T(F)TN​=T(F). The empty set and a singleton have tour length zero.

The main theorem concerns a functional LLL on all finite subsets of QQQ. A level k≥1k\ge1k≥1 dyadic square CCC has side 2−k2^{-k}2−k. Say that LLL has regularity constant K0>0K_0>0K0​>0 when, for every finite FFF and every finite G⊆CG\subseteq CG⊆C, if a point of FFF lies within Euclidean distance 2−k+22^{-k+2}2−k+2 of CCC, then

L(F)≤L(F∪G)≤L(F)+K0,2−k∣G∣.L(F)\le L(F\cup G)\le L(F)+K_0,2^{-k}\sqrt{|G|}.L(F)≤L(F∪G)≤L(F)+K0​,2−k∣G∣​.

The first inequality is monotonicity under adding points. The second limits the added cost when the new points lie in a small square near an existing point. Lemma 11.2.1 says that the shortest tour functional TTT has this property with a universal constant. In particular, the functional in the main theorem is not an arbitrary real function on samples: it must obey this condition for every admissible square and pair of finite sets.

A median MMM of L(F)L(F)L(F) is any real number for which both P(L(F)≤M)P(L(F)\le M)P(L(F)≤M) and P(L(F)≥M)P(L(F)\ge M)P(L(F)≥M) are at least one half. The theorem applies to every median. This convention avoids selecting one median when the distribution has more than one.

For the intermediate geometric estimates, k0k_0k0​ is the largest integer with 22k0≤N2^{2k_0}\le N22k0​≤N. Given a deviation parameter ttt, k1k_1k1​ is the integer selected by the criterion (11.1.9) after the paper sets the auxiliary Poisson intensity to N/8N/8N/8. The number mkm_kmk​ counts level kkk squares that contain at most N2−2k−6N2^{-2k-6}N2−2k−6 distinct sample points. An isolation weight α(x)\alpha(x)α(x) records the largest scale between k1k_1k1​ and k0k_0k0​ at which the square containing xxx contains at most N2−2k−7N2^{-2k-7}N2−2k−7 sample points, and equals 2−k02^{-k_0}2−k0​ if no such scale exists.

Formalization targets

Gaussian concentration for regular geometric functionals

For each fixed K0>0K_0>0K0​>0, there is a constant K>0K>0K>0, independent of NNN and LLL, such that every measurable LLL with the regularity property above satisfies, for all t≥0t\ge0t≥0,

P(∣L(F)−M∣≥t)≤Kexp⁡(−t2/K).P\bigl(|L(F)-M|\ge t\bigr)\le K\exp(-t^2/K).P(∣L(F)−M∣≥t)≤Kexp(−t2/K).

This is Theorem 11.2.2, the goal. Its constant may depend on the fixed regularity constant K0K_0K0​. Lemma 11.2.1 makes the tour length a direct instance. The milestone list also includes the quantitative sparse-square estimate of Proposition 11.1.4, the isolation-weight bound of Proposition 11.2.3, and the deterministic insertion estimate of Proposition 11.2.5. These retain the paper's specified thresholds and the dependency of their constants.

Significance

For TNT_NTN​, the result supplies a tail bound whose scale does not grow with the number of sample points. It says that the shortest tour length lies near a median with a Gaussian-form upper bound on the probability of a deviation. It does not identify the median or give an algorithm for finding the optimal tour. The abstract form also covers other finite-set functionals once their local regularity condition is established.

The paper proves these claims in ordinary mathematics. This mission asks for machine-checked proofs of the stated concentration, geometric occupancy, and tour-insertion results. The reusable outputs include a finite-set model of Euclidean tours and a precise interface for local regularity; the dyadic occupancy and isolation-weight definitions can support later sections on other geometric structures. No machine-checked proof of these specific chapter results is claimed here.

Difficulty

A naive bounded-differences estimate treats the effect of changing a sample point as if a single fixed worst-case insertion cost applied everywhere. That loses the paper's uniform fluctuation scale: a point can be unusually isolated, and its insertion cost can be much larger than the cost near a typical dense cluster. The central problem is to keep track of those irregular locations while retaining a bound uniform in NNN. The chapter's dyadic-square counts and isolation weights make this difficulty explicit in the statements.

Formalization scope

Points are pairs of real coordinates constrained to [0,1][0,1][0,1], represented as functions on Fin 2. Their distance is the Euclidean ℓ2\ell^2ℓ2 distance, defined explicitly; the default norm on a Lean function space would give a different metric. The random sample is a product of coordinatewise uniform probability measures. FFF is the set of distinct sampled locations, so ties have a defined value. Tour length is the minimum cyclic tour cost over the finite set, using the published generic metric-TSP tour model as its base.

Dyadic squares are closed in the local regularity condition. For the single square assigned to a point in the definition of α\alphaα, the implementation uses half-open cells, with the right endpoint 111 assigned to the final cell. This resolves only grid-line ties, which have probability zero under the stated sample law. Counts use distinct locations, as does the paper's set FFF. All probability inequalities are compared in the extended nonnegative reals. The event bound is written with ENNReal.ofReal; a negative formal lower bound represents the paper's trivial probability lower bound. The main theorem explicitly assumes measurability of the sample functional, following the paper's convention that all relevant functions are measurable. Theorems in Section 11.1 retain t≥1t\ge1t≥1 and t≤N/Kt\le\sqrt N/Kt≤N​/K; the main theorem covers every t≥0t\ge0t≥0.

The formalization must not replace the square's uniform law by an arbitrary distribution, use a supremum-norm tour, or place the existential constant after NNN or LLL. Contributions toward the goal may develop measure-theoretic facts about the product law, finite Euclidean tours, dyadic occupancy bounds, or the insertion estimate. Those interfaces have uses beyond this chapter.

Selected references

  • Michel Talagrand, Concentration of measure and isoperimetric inequalities in product spaces, Publications Mathématiques de l'IHÉS 81 (1995), 73–205. DOI: 10.1007/BF02699376.
7 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
CombinatoricsOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Concentration of Measure and Isoperimetric Inequalities in Product Spaces VII: Bin Packing — P(|B_N − M| ≥ 1 + u) ≤ 8 exp(−u²/(64 N E X₁²))Textbook

Motivation

Bin packing asks for the minimum number of unit-capacity bins into which a list of items with sizes in [0,1][0,1][0,1] can be packed. It is one of the basic NP-hard problems of combinatorial optimization and operations research, and its stochastic version, where the item sizes are random, has a large literature (Coffman and Lueker, Probabilistic Analysis of Packing and Partitioning Algorithms, 1991). A first question about the random optimum is how strongly it concentrates around its typical value.

A short history of that question, as Talagrand recounts it on p. 151 of the source:

  • Late 1980s. Martingale methods (Rhee–Talagrand; McDiarmid, On the method of bounded differences, 1989) give P(∣BN−EBN∣≥t)≤2exp⁡(−2t2/N)P(|B_N - \mathbb E B_N| \ge t) \le 2\exp(-2t^2/N)P(∣BN​−EBN​∣≥t)≤2exp(−2t2/N) for NNN i.i.d. items. The exponent ignores the item sizes.
  • 1994. Since BNB_NBN​ behaves like ∑iXi\sum_i X_i∑i​Xi​ when the items are small, the right exponent should be of order t2/(Nvar⁡X1)t^2/(N\operatorname{var} X_1)t2/(NvarX1​), or at least t2/(N EX12)t^2/(N\,\mathbb E X_1^2)t2/(NEX12​). The second form was proved by W. Rhee (Inequalities for the Bin Packing Problem III, Optimization 29 (1994), 381–385) using non-trivial bin-packing theory.
  • 1995. Talagrand (Publ. Math. IHÉS 81, Chapter 6) derives the t2/(N EX12)t^2/(N\,\mathbb E X_1^2)t2/(NEX12​) bound in a few lines from his convex hull distance inequality, using only trivial facts about bin packing.

This mission formalizes that chapter.

Setting

Let Ω=[0,1]\Omega = [0,1]Ω=[0,1] and N≥0N \ge 0N≥0. A point x=(x1,…,xN)∈ΩNx = (x_1,\dots,x_N) \in \Omega^Nx=(x1​,…,xN​)∈ΩN is a list of item sizes. A packing into kkk bins is a map σ:{1,…,N}→{1,…,k}\sigma : \{1,\dots,N\} \to \{1,\dots,k\}σ:{1,…,N}→{1,…,k} with ∑i:σ(i)=jxi≤1\sum_{i:\sigma(i)=j} x_i \le 1∑i:σ(i)=j​xi​≤1 for every bin jjj. The bin packing number BN(x)B_N(x)BN​(x) is the least kkk for which a packing exists (NNN bins always suffice; BN=0B_N = 0BN​=0 when N=0N = 0N=0).

Further notation, as in Lean (TalagrandConc.BinPacking):

  • ∥x∥2=(∑i≤Nxi2)1/2\|x\|_2 = (\sum_{i \le N} x_i^2)^{1/2}∥x∥2​=(∑i≤N​xi2​)1/2 (l2Norm);
  • for real aaa, the level set A(a)={y∈ΩN:BN(y)≤a}A(a) = \{y \in \Omega^N : B_N(y) \le a\}A(a)={y∈ΩN:BN​(y)≤a} (levelSet);
  • for A⊆ΩNA \subseteq \Omega^NA⊆ΩN and x∈ΩNx \in \Omega^Nx∈ΩN, UA(x)={s∈{0,1}N:∃y∈A, si=0⇒xi=yi}U_A(x) = \{s \in \{0,1\}^N : \exists y \in A,\ s_i = 0 \Rightarrow x_i = y_i\}UA​(x)={s∈{0,1}N:∃y∈A, si​=0⇒xi​=yi​}, its convex hull VA(x)⊆RNV_A(x) \subseteq \mathbb R^NVA​(x)⊆RN, and the convex hull distance fc(A,x)f_c(A,x)fc​(A,x), the Euclidean distance from 000 to VA(x)V_A(x)VA​(x), valued in [0,+∞][0,+\infty][0,+∞] (U, V, convexDist);
  • μ\muμ a probability measure on [0,1][0,1][0,1], P=μ⊗NP = \mu^{\otimes N}P=μ⊗N the product probability on [0,1]N[0,1]^N[0,1]N, whose coordinates X1,…,XNX_1,\dots,X_NX1​,…,XN​ are i.i.d. items with law μ\muμ, and EX12=∫ω2 dμ(ω)\mathbb E X_1^2 = \int \omega^2\,d\mu(\omega)EX12​=∫ω2dμ(ω) (secondMoment);
  • MMM is a median of BNB_NBN​ if P(BN≤M)≥1/2P(B_N \le M) \ge 1/2P(BN​≤M)≥1/2 and P(BN≥M)≥1/2P(B_N \ge M) \ge 1/2P(BN​≥M)≥1/2 (IsMedian).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6.5 (p. 152)

For every median MMM of BNB_NBN​ and every uuu with 0≤u≤82 N EX120 \le u \le 8\sqrt2\,N\,\mathbb E X_1^20≤u≤82​NEX12​,

P(∣BN(X1,…,XN)−M∣≥1+u)≤8exp⁡(−u264 N EX12).P\big(|B_N(X_1,\dots,X_N) - M| \ge 1 + u\big) \le 8\exp\Big(-\frac{u^2}{64\,N\,\mathbb E X_1^2}\Big).P(∣BN​(X1​,…,XN​)−M∣≥1+u)≤8exp(−64NEX12​u2​).

Milestones

  1. Lemma 6.1 (p. 151): BN(x1,…,xN)≤2∑i≤Nxi+1B_N(x_1,\dots,x_N) \le 2\sum_{i\le N} x_i + 1BN​(x1​,…,xN​)≤2∑i≤N​xi​+1.
  2. Lemma 6.2, Eq. (6.2) (p. 151): for a>0a > 0a>0 and all xxx, BN(x)≤a+2∥x∥2 fc(A(a),x)+1B_N(x) \le a + 2\|x\|_2\, f_c(A(a),x) + 1BN​(x)≤a+2∥x∥2​fc​(A(a),x)+1.
  3. Lemma 6.3, Eq. (6.3) (p. 152): P(∥x∥2≥2N(EX12)1/2)≤exp⁡(−2N EX12)P(\|x\|_2 \ge 2\sqrt N(\mathbb E X_1^2)^{1/2}) \le \exp(-2N\,\mathbb E X_1^2)P(∥x∥2​≥2N​(EX12​)1/2)≤exp(−2NEX12​).
  4. Proposition 6.4, Eq. (6.4) (p. 152): for all t>0t > 0t>0, a>0a > 0a>0,
P(BN≤a) P(BN≥a+4tN(EX12)1/2+1)≤e−t2/4+e−2N EX12.P(B_N \le a)\,P\big(B_N \ge a + 4t\sqrt N(\mathbb E X_1^2)^{1/2} + 1\big) \le e^{-t^2/4} + e^{-2N\,\mathbb E X_1^2}.P(BN​≤a)P(BN​≥a+4tN​(EX12​)1/2+1)≤e−t2/4+e−2NEX12​.

The goal keeps the paper's explicit constants 888, 646464 and 828\sqrt282​.

Significance

The result. Theorem 6.5 shows that the random optimum BNB_NBN​ fluctuates on the scale N EX12\sqrt{N\,\mathbb E X_1^2}NEX12​​ rather than N\sqrt NN​. For small items (EX12→0\mathbb E X_1^2 \to 0EX12​→0) this is much sharper than the martingale bound, and it is the scale of the fluctuations of ∑iXi\sum_i X_i∑i​Xi​, which is a lower bound on BNB_NBN​. Chapter 6 is also the first application in Part II of the paper, and its scheme recurs in the later chapters: a deterministic lemma relating the functional to fcf_cfc​ of a level set, a tail bound for an auxiliary factor, and Theorem 4.1.1 to finish.

Formalizing it. The result is proved (Talagrand 1995; Rhee 1994 by another route). No machine-checked proof is known to exist: the platform has no random bin packing statement and no general-Ω\OmegaΩ form of Talagrand's convex distance inequality. A complete development gives a checked concentration bound for an NP-hard combinatorial optimum, plus a bin-packing layer (the optimum as a minimum over assignments, Lemma 6.1, monotonicity in the item set) that other formalizations can reuse.

Difficulty

The obvious route is a bounded-differences argument: changing one item changes BNB_NBN​ by at most one. That route yields only the exponent t2/Nt^2/Nt2/N, because it cannot see that small items change little. Replacing the Hamming geometry by one weighted by item sizes is the point. The weights xix_ixi​ depend on the point xxx itself, so no fixed weighted Hamming distance works. The convex hull distance fcf_cfc​ controls every weighting at once, and the resulting factor ∥x∥2\|x\|_2∥x∥2​ is random and must be controlled separately (Lemma 6.3). In Lean, the further difficulty is the probabilistic input: Theorem 4.1.1 / Eq. (4.1.2) for a general (non-finite) Ω=[0,1]\Omega = [0,1]Ω=[0,1] is not available, and the convex-hull minimax step (Lemma 4.1.2) behind Lemma 6.2 must be formalized too.

Formalization scope

  • Ω=[0,1]\Omega = [0,1]Ω=[0,1] is Mathlib's unitInterval. Coordinates are Fin N (0-based). PPP is Measure.pi (fun _ : Fin N => μ) for μ : Measure unitInterval with IsProbabilityMeasure μ. No density is assumed.
  • BNB_NBN​ is sInf {k : ℕ | IsPacking x k}, an exact minimum over assignments Fin N → Fin k, not a heuristic such as First Fit. Zero-size items are allowed, as in the paper.
  • fcf_cfc​ is an infimum in ℝ≥0∞ with the Euclidean norm written out (+∞+\infty+∞ for an empty set; Mathlib's default norm on Fin N → ℝ is the sup norm). Lemma 6.2 is stated in ℝ≥0∞.
  • Probabilities are ℝ≥0∞-valued. Every event in the statements ({BN≤a}\{B_N \le a\}{BN​≤a}, {∥x∥2≥c}\{\|x\|_2 \ge c\}{∥x∥2​≥c}) is Borel. The paper's measurability convention matters only inside the proofs.
  • Theorem 6.5 makes the paper's implicit u≥0u \ge 0u≥0 explicit, and it is stated for every median, not for a chosen one. Lean's u2/0=0u^2/0 = 0u2/0=0 matters only in the degenerate case N EX12=0N\,\mathbb E X_1^2 = 0NEX12​=0, which forces u=0u = 0u=0. There the bound is 888.
  • Not admissible: weakening the range of uuu (the bound fails for large uuu when EX12\mathbb E X_1^2EX12​ is small), replacing EX12\mathbb E X_1^2EX12​ by 111, or defining BNB_NBN​ through a heuristic or a real-valued sInf.
  • Infrastructure needed: Talagrand's inequality (4.1.2) on a general product probability space (posed on the platform only in a finite-alphabet form) and Lemma 4.1.2. Both are welcome as separate contributions. A Chebyshev/exponential-moment bound gives Lemma 6.3.

Selected references

  • M. Talagrand, Concentration of measure and isoperimetric inequalities in product spaces, Publ. Math. IHÉS 81 (1995), 73–205, Chapter 6, pp. 151–152. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02699376
  • W. Rhee, Inequalities for the Bin Packing Problem III, Optimization 29 (1994), 381–385.
  • C. McDiarmid, On the method of bounded differences, Surveys in Combinatorics 1989, LMS Lecture Note Series 141, Cambridge Univ. Press, 148–188. https://doi.org/10.1017/CBO9781107359949.008
  • E. G. Coffman Jr., G. S. Lueker, Probabilistic Analysis of Packing and Partitioning Algorithms, Wiley, 1991.
6 thms3 active usersReviewed
Bandit AlgorithmsOperations ResearchStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Some Aspects of the Sequential Design of Experiments II: Staying on Heads and Switching on Tails Loses at Most 3 − 2√2 per Toss in the Long RunResearch Paper

Motivation

In 1952 Herbert Robbins asked how a statistician should draw a sample sequentially from two populations when the goal is the largest possible expected total, not a test or an estimate after the fact (Robbins 1952). This is the problem now called the two-armed bandit, and Robbins' paper is the usual starting point of the multi-armed bandit literature that underlies clinical-trial allocation, adaptive experimentation and online recommendation (Lattimore and Szepesvári 2020).

Robbins illustrated the problem with two coins. His first concrete rule, "stay on heads, switch on tails" (later known as win-stay, lose-shift or play the winner), uses only the outcome of the last toss, yet its long-run loss relative to an observer who knows the better coin is at most 3−23/2≈0.1723-2^{3/2}\approx 0.1723−23/2≈0.172 per toss, against 1/21/21/2 for a rule that ignores the outcomes. The same rule was studied again in clinical-trial design as "play the winner" (Zelen 1969).

Timeline. 1952: Robbins computes the operating characteristics of the stay-or-switch rule R1R_1R1​ and of the outcome-blind rule R0R_0R0​ for two coins, and shows that a greedy rule with sparse forced sampling attains max⁡(α,β)\max(\alpha,\beta)max(α,β) for arbitrary populations with finite means (Section 2). 1969: Zelen proposes the play-the-winner rule for clinical trials. 1985: Lai and Robbins give the logarithmic lower bound on regret and rules that attain it (Lai and Robbins 1985).

Setting

Two coins AAA and BBB have unknown head probabilities α\alphaα and β\betaβ, with 0≤α,β≤10\le\alpha,\beta\le10≤α,β≤1. A head pays \1,atailpaysnothing.If, a tail pays nothing. If ,atailpaysnothing.Ifx_i\in{0,1}isthepayoffoftheis the payoff of theisthepayoffofthei−thtoss,-th toss, −thtoss,S_n=x_1+\dots+x_nisthetotalreceivedafteris the total received afteristhetotalreceivedafterntosses.Intheformaldevelopmentthepairofcoinsisa∗∗two−armedstochasticbandit∗∗:armtosses. In the formal development the pair of coins is a **two-armed stochastic bandit**: armtosses.Intheformaldevelopmentthepairofcoinsisa∗∗two−armedstochasticbandit∗∗:arm0iscoinis coiniscoinA,withpayofflaw, with payoff law ,withpayofflaw(1-\alpha)\delta_0+\alpha\delta_1,andarm, and arm ,andarm1iscoinis coiniscoinB,withpayofflaw, with payoff law ,withpayofflaw(1-\beta)\delta_0+\beta\delta_1$.

A sampling rule chooses the coin for each toss from the outcomes of the earlier tosses. Two rules are studied.

  • Rule R1R_1R1​. For the first toss choose AAA or BBB at random. Then, for i=1,2,…i=1,2,\dotsi=1,2,…, if the iii-th toss results in heads, use the same coin for the (i+1)(i+1)(i+1)-th toss; if it results in tails, switch to the other coin.
  • Rule R0R_0R0​. Choose one of the two coins at random and then use it for every toss.

Write pip_ipi​ for the probability of heads on the iii-th toss under the rule in use, and E(Sn/n)\mathrm E(S_n/n)E(Sn​/n) for the expected average payoff of the first nnn tosses. The paper's two parameters are

γ=α+β2,δ=∣α−β∣2,\gamma=\frac{\alpha+\beta}{2},\qquad \delta=\frac{|\alpha-\beta|}{2},γ=2α+β​,δ=2∣α−β∣​,

so that max⁡(α,β)=γ+δ\max(\alpha,\beta)=\gamma+\deltamax(α,β)=γ+δ is the expected payoff per toss of an observer who knows the better coin. Following the paper, α\alphaα and β\betaβ are assumed not both 000 and not both 111; then ∣α+β−1∣<1|\alpha+\beta-1|<1∣α+β−1∣<1.

Formalization targets

Goal: the asymptotic loss of R1R_1R1​ and its maximum

Under R1R_1R1​,

lim⁡n→∞E ⁣(Snn)=γ+δ21−γ,L(A,B,R1)=lim⁡n→∞[max⁡(α,β)−E ⁣(Snn)]=δ[1−δ1−γ],\lim_{n\to\infty}\mathrm E\!\left(\frac{S_n}{n}\right)=\gamma+\frac{\delta^2}{1-\gamma}, \qquad L(A,B,R_1)=\lim_{n\to\infty}\left[\max(\alpha,\beta)-\mathrm E\!\left(\frac{S_n}{n}\right)\right]=\delta\left[1-\frac{\delta}{1-\gamma}\right],n→∞lim​E(nSn​​)=γ+1−γδ2​,L(A,B,R1​)=n→∞lim​[max(α,β)−E(nSn​​)]=δ[1−1−γδ​],

and for every admissible pair of coins

0≤L(A,B,R1)≤M1=3−23/2,0\le L(A,B,R_1)\le M_1=3-2^{3/2},0≤L(A,B,R1​)≤M1​=3−23/2,

with equality at α=0, β=2−21/2\alpha=0,\ \beta=2-2^{1/2}α=0, β=2−21/2 and at α=2−21/2, β=0\alpha=2-2^{1/2},\ \beta=0α=2−21/2, β=0 (Eqs. (6), (8) and the text after (8), p. 531).

Milestones, in the order of the argument

  1. Eq. (2): pi+1=(α+β−1)pi+(α+β−2αβ)p_{i+1}=(\alpha+\beta-1)p_i+(\alpha+\beta-2\alpha\beta)pi+1​=(α+β−1)pi​+(α+β−2αβ) for i≥1i\ge1i≥1.
  2. Eq. (3): the closed form pi=(α+β−1)i−1[p1−c]+cp_i=(\alpha+\beta-1)^{i-1}\bigl[p_1-c\bigr]+cpi​=(α+β−1)i−1[p1​−c]+c with c=(α+β−2αβ)/(2−(α+β))c=(\alpha+\beta-2\alpha\beta)/(2-(\alpha+\beta))c=(α+β−2αβ)/(2−(α+β)).
  3. Eqs. (4)–(5): lim⁡ipi=c=γ+δ2/(1−γ)\lim_i p_i=c=\gamma+\delta^2/(1-\gamma)limi​pi​=c=γ+δ2/(1−γ).
  4. Eq. (6): both E(Sn/n)\mathrm E(S_n/n)E(Sn​/n) and (p1+⋯+pn)/n(p_1+\dots+p_n)/n(p1​+⋯+pn​)/n have the stated limit.
  5. Eqs. (7)–(8) and M1M_1M1​: max⁡(α,β)=γ+δ\max(\alpha,\beta)=\gamma+\deltamax(α,β)=γ+δ and 0≤δ[1−δ/(1−γ)]≤3−23/20\le\delta[1-\delta/(1-\gamma)]\le 3-2^{3/2}0≤δ[1−δ/(1−γ)]≤3−23/2, with the two maximizers.
  6. Rule R0R_0R0​: L(A,B,R0)=δL(A,B,R_0)=\deltaL(A,B,R0​)=δ, whose maximum over the admissible pairs is M0=1/2M_0=1/2M0​=1/2, at (0,1)(0,1)(0,1) and (1,0)(1,0)(1,0).

Significance

The result. The goal quantifies how much an extremely simple adaptive rule recovers. A rule blind to outcomes loses up to half a dollar per toss; one bit of memory cuts the worst case to about 0.1720.1720.172. Robbins used this comparison to argue that the sequential design problem has nontrivial, computable answers, and to motivate the forced-sampling rule Rˉ\bar RRˉ of the same section, whose loss tends to 000. The closed forms (3)–(6) are the exact operating characteristics of the four-state Markov chain (coin,outcome)(\text{coin},\text{outcome})(coin,outcome) that R1R_1R1​ generates.

Formalizing it. The results are classical and elementary on paper, but none of them has a machine-checked proof. The mission produces a verified chain from the canonical bandit measure to an explicit long-run payoff: the head probability of a fixed toss is computed from the law of the whole trajectory, the recursion is derived from the rule's kernels, and the Cesàro limit closes the argument. The same pattern applies to any finite-memory bandit rule, and the coin bandit and the two rules are reusable test cases for the platform's bandit library. No platform theorem states R1R_1R1​, its recursion or its loss; other two-state models on the platform (a Markov-renewal gain rate, an MDP gadget) are different objects.

Difficulty

The recursion (2) is a statement about the trajectory law, not about a Markov chain given in advance: the chain (coini,xi)(\text{coin}_i,x_i)(coini​,xi​) has to be extracted from the Ionescu–Tulcea construction of the bandit measure, where the coin of toss i+1i+1i+1 is a deterministic function of toss iii and the payoff is drawn from the chosen coin's law. The head probability alone is not a Markov chain: pi+1p_{i+1}pi+1​ depends on the joint law of coin and outcome at toss iii, so a naive one-step argument on pip_ipi​ does not apply, and the affine form of (2) is a property of this particular rule. The maximization in (8) is over a two-dimensional region whose maximizers lie on the boundary α=0\alpha=0α=0 or β=0\beta=0β=0, and the excluded corners are exactly where the formula δ/(1−γ)\delta/(1-\gamma)δ/(1−γ) breaks down.

Formalization scope

The bandit is the published BanditAlgorithm.StochasticBandit 2; the rules are policies of the published type BanditPolicy 2, and probabilities and expectations are taken under the published infinite-horizon measure banditTrajMeasure, whose coordinate ttt is toss t+1t+1t+1. Head probabilities are elements of unitInterval. The conventions committed to are:

  • "At random" for the first coin of R1R_1R1​ and R0R_0R0​ is the fair choice, probability 1/21/21/2 each.
  • Heads is the payoff value 111; pip_ipi​ is defined for i≥1i\ge1i≥1 and every statement quantifies over i≥1i\ge1i≥1 or n≥1n\ge1n≥1.
  • "Not both 000 or both 111" is the hypothesis ¬(α=0∧β=0)∧¬(α=1∧β=1)\neg(\alpha=0\wedge\beta=0)\wedge\neg(\alpha=1\wedge\beta=1)¬(α=0∧β=0)∧¬(α=1∧β=1), never 0<α0<\alpha0<α or α<1\alpha<1α<1, which would remove the maximizer α=0\alpha=0α=0. Robbins states it immediately before Eq. (2), and the Lean carries it through the probability and loss results.
  • The paper's "lim⁡E(Sn/n)=lim⁡(p1+⋯+pn)/n\lim E(S_n/n)=\lim (p_1+\dots+p_n)/nlimE(Sn​/n)=lim(p1​+⋯+pn​)/n" is stated as convergence of both sequences to the same value.
  • "L(A,B,R1)L(A,B,R_1)L(A,B,R1​) has its maximum value M1M_1M1​ when …" is read as: L≤M1L\le M_1L≤M1​ for every admissible (α,β)(\alpha,\beta)(α,β), and L=M1L=M_1L=M1​ at both named points ("or vice versa").
  • 23/22^{3/2}23/2 is written 222\sqrt222​. The numerical asides (≈.172\approx .172≈.172, ≈.586\approx .586≈.586, "17.2 cents") are not formalized, nor is the "tossing the two coins alternately" variant of R0R_0R0​.

The asymptotic loss is stated as the limit of max⁡(α,β)−E(Sn/n)\max(\alpha,\beta)-\mathrm E(S_n/n)max(α,β)−E(Sn​/n); defining LLL by its closed form would make the goal a tautology. Likewise, the head probabilities are computed from the law of the rule on the coins: positing a sequence that satisfies (2) would drop the probabilistic content.

A complete development needs: the one-dimensional marginals of banditTrajMeasure (the law of coordinate t+1t+1t+1 given the prefix), the joint law of (coin, payoff) at each toss, linearity of expectation for bounded payoffs, a Cesàro-mean lemma, and a short two-variable optimization. The trajectory-marginal lemmas are reusable for every bandit mission on the platform; contributions that prove them in general are welcome.

Selected references

  • H. Robbins, Some aspects of the sequential design of experiments, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 58(5) (1952), 527–535. https://doi.org/10.1090/S0002-9904-1952-09620-8
  • M. Zelen, Play the winner rule and the controlled clinical trial, J. Amer. Statist. Assoc. 64 (1969), 131–146. https://doi.org/10.1080/01621459.1969.10500959
  • T. L. Lai and H. Robbins, Asymptotically efficient adaptive allocation rules, Adv. Appl. Math. 6 (1985), 4–22. https://doi.org/10.1016/0196-8858(85)90002-8
  • T. Lattimore and C. Szepesvári, Bandit Algorithms, Cambridge University Press, 2020. https://doi.org/10.1017/9781108571401
12 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Markov ChainOperations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Stochastic Processes Occurring in the Theory of Queues and their Analysis by the Method of the Imbedded Markov Chain: In GI/M/s, a Positive Wait Is Exponential and a Positive Queue GeometricResearch Paper

Motivation

A many-server queue in which customers arrive at the epochs of a renewal process and are served for exponential times is the basic model of a telephone exchange, a call centre, or a bank of identical machines. Its continuous-time queue-length process is not Markovian unless the arrivals are Poisson, so Erlang's birth–death formulas for M/M/s do not apply. In 1953 D. G. Kendall showed how to analyse such systems by the method of the imbedded Markov chain: observe the system only at the arrival epochs, where the number of customers present does form a Markov chain, and read the equilibrium behaviour off that chain (Kendall 1953).

Timeline:

  • Erlang (1908–1929) treated M/M/s, where the queue length is itself Markovian.
  • Kendall (1951) treated M/G/1 by a chain imbedded at departure epochs.
  • W. L. Smith (Kendall's ref. [19]) observed that for a single server, under restrictions on the input law, exponential service gives an exponential waiting time apart from an atom at zero.
  • Kendall (1953), this paper, treated GI/M/s for every input law and every number of servers sss, and showed that Smith's restrictions are unnecessary.
  • Foster (1953) gave the criterion for ergodicity of a denumerable chain through a summable invariant vector, which is the step Kendall's argument relies on.

Setting

Customers arrive with independent inter-arrival times of law AAA on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) and mean aaa, 0<a<∞0<a<\infty0<a<∞. There are s≥1s\ge 1s≥1 servers and a single queue served first come, first served. Service times are independent of one another and of the input, negative-exponential with mean bbb, 0<b<∞0<b<\infty0<b<∞. The relative traffic intensity is ρ=b/(sa)\rho=b/(sa)ρ=b/(sa).

The state of the imbedded chain at an arrival epoch is the number i∈{0,1,2,… }i\in\{0,1,2,\dots\}i∈{0,1,2,…} of persons found ahead (waiting or in service) by the arriving customer. Its transition matrix P=[pij]P=[p_{ij}]P=[pij​] of eq. (8) is given in three blocks, written with the death-process probabilities [n∣m]=∫0∞(mn)(1−e−u/b)ne−(m−n)u/b dA(u)[n\mid m]=\int_0^\infty\binom{m}{n}(1-e^{-u/b})^n e^{-(m-n)u/b}\,dA(u)[n∣m]=∫0∞​(nm​)(1−e−u/b)ne−(m−n)u/bdA(u) of (9)–(10), the probabilities {n∣s;m}\{n\mid s;m\}{n∣s;m} of (11)–(12), and the Poisson probabilities (n∣s)=∫0∞e−su/b(su/b)n/n! dA(u)(n\mid s)=\int_0^\infty e^{-su/b}(su/b)^n/n!\,dA(u)(n∣s)=∫0∞​e−su/b(su/b)n/n!dA(u) of (13)–(14):

pij={(i+1−j∣s)j≥s, j≤i+1,[ i+1−j∣i+1 ]i<s, j<s, j≤i+1,{s−j∣s; i−s+1}i≥s, j<s,0j>i+1.p_{ij}=\begin{cases}(i+1-j\mid s) & j\ge s,\ j\le i+1,\\ [\,i+1-j\mid i+1\,] & i<s,\ j<s,\ j\le i+1,\\ \{s-j\mid s;\,i-s+1\} & i\ge s,\ j<s,\\ 0 & j>i+1.\end{cases}pij​=⎩⎨⎧​(i+1−j∣s)[i+1−j∣i+1]{s−j∣s;i−s+1}0​j≥s, j≤i+1,i<s, j<s, j≤i+1,i≥s, j<s,j>i+1.​

The key function is

F(λ)=∫0∞e−(1−λ)su/b dA(u).F(\lambda)=\int_0^\infty e^{-(1-\lambda)su/b}\,dA(u).F(λ)=∫0∞​e−(1−λ)su/bdA(u).

The queue size met by an arrival is Q=max⁡(i−s,0)Q=\max(i-s,0)Q=max(i−s,0). The waiting time www is, given iii, the sum of k=max⁡(i−s+1,0)k=\max(i-s+1,0)k=max(i−s+1,0) independent exponential variables of mean b/sb/sb/s.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem IV (p. 350)

When ρ<1\rho<1ρ<1 the chain has a limiting distribution π\piπ, and with λ\lambdaλ the root of F(λ)=λF(\lambda)=\lambdaF(λ)=λ in (0,1)(0,1)(0,1) and c=b/(s(1−λ))c=b/(s(1-\lambda))c=b/(s(1−λ)),

Pr⁡(Q=n∣Q>0)=(1−λ)λn−1 (n≥1),Pr⁡(w>t∣w>0)=e−t/c (t≥0),\Pr(Q=n\mid Q>0)=(1-\lambda)\lambda^{n-1}\ (n\ge1),\qquad \Pr(w>t\mid w>0)=e^{-t/c}\ (t\ge0),Pr(Q=n∣Q>0)=(1−λ)λn−1 (n≥1),Pr(w>t∣w>0)=e−t/c (t≥0),

with both conditioning events of positive probability. The goal fixes no constant beyond those the theorem names: λ\lambdaλ and ccc are determined by AAA, bbb and sss.

Milestones

  • The matrix is stochastic (p. 349), and the chain is irreducible and aperiodic (p. 347).
  • The coefficients (n∣s)(n\mid s)(n∣s) are positive, sum to one and have mean 1/ρ1/\rho1/ρ; F(λ)=∑n(n∣s)λnF(\lambda)=\sum_n (n\mid s)\lambda^nF(λ)=∑n​(n∣s)λn; for ρ<1\rho<1ρ<1 the equation F(λ)=λF(\lambda)=\lambdaF(λ)=λ has a unique root in (0,1)(0,1)(0,1) (p. 348–349).
  • For the trial vector x=[μ0,…,μs−2,1,λ,λ2,… ]x=[\mu_0,\dots,\mu_{s-2},1,\lambda,\lambda^2,\dots]x=[μ0​,…,μs−2​,1,λ,λ2,…] (15): the invariance equations for j≥sj\ge sj≥s are equivalent to F(λ)=λF(\lambda)=\lambdaF(λ)=λ; those for 1≤j≤s−11\le j\le s-11≤j≤s−1 determine the μ\muμ's; the one for j=0j=0j=0 follows from the row sums (pp. 348–349).
  • A nonnull absolutely summable invariant vector makes the chain ergodic, and normalized it is the limiting distribution (p. 348).
  • Theorem I: for ρ<1\rho<1ρ<1 the chain is irreducible and ergodic, and πj=Cλj−(s−1)\pi_j=C\lambda^{j-(s-1)}πj​=Cλj−(s−1) for j≥s−1j\ge s-1j≥s−1.
  • Theorem II: Pr⁡(Q=0)=α=∑μ+1+λ∑μ+1/(1−λ)\Pr(Q=0)=\alpha=\dfrac{\sum\mu+1+\lambda}{\sum\mu+1/(1-\lambda)}Pr(Q=0)=α=∑μ+1/(1−λ)∑μ+1+λ​ and Pr⁡(w=0)=β=∑μ+1∑μ+1/(1−λ)\Pr(w=0)=\beta=\dfrac{\sum\mu+1}{\sum\mu+1/(1-\lambda)}Pr(w=0)=β=∑μ+1/(1−λ)∑μ+1​.
  • Theorem III: E(Q)=(1−α)/(1−λ)E(Q)=(1-\alpha)/(1-\lambda)E(Q)=(1−α)/(1−λ) and E(w)/b=(1−β)/(s(1−λ))E(w)/b=(1-\beta)/(s(1-\lambda))E(w)/b=(1−β)/(s(1−λ)).
  • Eq. (27): for M/M/s the root is λ=ρ\lambda=\rhoλ=ρ.

Significance

Theorem IV says that, whatever the input law and the number of servers, the part of the equilibrium waiting-time law away from zero is exponential and the part of the queue-size law away from zero is geometric, both governed by the single number λ\lambdaλ. All equilibrium quantities of GI/M/s (Theorems II–III and the delay distribution) then reduce to computing λ\lambdaλ from a one-dimensional equation and the finitely many μ\muμ's from a triangular linear system. This is the standard textbook treatment of G/M/c queues and the template for many later matrix-geometric results.

The results are proved in the paper, partly by appeal to Feller's theory of denumerable chains and to "tedious but elementary" verifications. None of them is machine-checked. The mission formalizes the paper's chain of argument: the explicit transition matrix, its stochasticity, the reduction of the invariance equations, the passage from a summable invariant vector to the limiting distribution, and the computation of the laws of QQQ and www from it. The single-server special cases are posed separately on the platform (QueueingFundamentals.GM1.arrival_point_geometric, GM1.waiting_time_cdf, GM1.arrival_point_means, GM1.mean_waiting_times, FosterQueues.GIM1.gim1_classification); they do not cover s≥2s\ge2s≥2.

Difficulty

The obvious route is to guess the geometric tail and check it against the balance equations. For j≥sj\ge sj≥s this works, but the rows i≥si\ge si≥s of the block B\mathbf BB involve the convolution integral (11), and the equations for j<sj<sj<s couple the geometric tail to the boundary terms μ0,…,μs−2\mu_0,\dots,\mu_{s-2}μ0​,…,μs−2​. Showing these are solvable, and that the row sums of the three-block matrix equal one, requires handling (11) explicitly. The second obstacle is the limit theorem itself: an invariant vector does not, by itself, give pijn→πjp^n_{ij}\to\pi_jpijn​→πj​. That step needs Feller's dichotomy for irreducible aperiodic denumerable chains, which Mathlib does not provide. Finally, the conditional waiting-time law requires summing an Erlang mixture with geometric weights in closed form.

Formalization scope

The queue process itself is not formalized. The chain is defined by its transition matrix (8)–(14), and www by the Erlang mixture of p. 349, as the paper derives both by a modelling argument. A chain is any TransitionMatrix P of the published Markov-chain vocabulary with P.p = gimsMatrix s A b; states are 000-based. "Ergodic" is Feller's: Aperiodic ∧ PositiveRecurrent. The limiting distribution is asserted as Tendsto (P.stepProb n i j) atTop (𝓝 (π j)) for all i,ji,ji,j, not as a stationary vector. The input law satisfies the published IsInterarrivalLaw A a⁻¹ (a probability measure carried by [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), integrable, mean aaa), and (n∣s)(n\mid s)(n∣s) is the published serviceProb A (s/b) n. Conditional laws are stated multiplied out, together with positivity of the conditioning probabilities. Every series identity is stated with HasSum.

Trivializing formalizations are ruled out: λ\lambdaλ is tied to F(λ)=λF(\lambda)=\lambdaF(λ)=λ on (0,1)(0,1)(0,1) rather than free; π\piπ is the limiting distribution of PPP, asserted to exist, not a probability vector handed to the statement; the conditioning events are asserted to have positive probability; the matrix is the GI/M/s matrix, not the GI/M/1 one; and the μ\muμ's of Theorems II–III are characterized by the invariance equations, never defined from π\piπ.

A complete development needs: Feller's limit theorem for irreducible aperiodic positive recurrent chains (reusable well beyond this mission), Foster's sufficiency criterion (referenced, open), Fubini for the stochastic-matrix identities, parametric interval integrals for the block B\mathbf BB, and Erlang distribution functions. Contributions to the general Markov-chain milestones are as welcome as those specific to GI/M/s.

Selected references

  • D. G. Kendall, Stochastic processes occurring in the theory of queues and their analysis by the method of the imbedded Markov chain, Ann. Math. Statist. 24(3), 338–354, 1953. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177728975
  • F. G. Foster, On the stochastic matrices associated with certain queuing processes, Ann. Math. Statist. 24(3), 355–360, 1953. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177728976
  • W. Feller, An Introduction to Probability Theory and Its Applications, Vol. 1, Wiley, 1950, ch. 15.
  • W. L. Smith, On the distribution of queueing times, Proc. Cambridge Philos. Soc. 49, 449–461, 1953 (cited by Kendall as "to be published", ref. [19]).
  • D. Gross, J. F. Shortle, J. M. Thompson, C. M. Harris, Fundamentals of Queueing Theory, 4th ed., Wiley, 2008, §5.3.
22 thms3 active usersReviewed
AnalysisOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

The Data-Driven Newsvendor Problem: New Bounds and Insights II: Every Log-Concave Demand Has Weighted Mean Spread at Least min(b,h)/(b+h)Research Paper

Motivation

The newsvendor problem is the basic single-period inventory model: a decision maker orders qqq units before a random demand DDD is observed, pays b>0b>0b>0 per unit of unmet demand and h>0h>0h>0 per unit left over, and minimizes the expected cost C(q)=E[b(D−q)++h(q−D)+]C(q)=E[b(D-q)^+ + h(q-D)^+]C(q)=E[b(D−q)++h(q−D)+]. When the distribution of DDD is known, the optimal order is the b/(b+h)b/(b+h)b/(b+h) quantile of DDD. In practice the distribution is unknown and only a sample of past demands is available; the standard data-driven order is the sample average approximation (SAA), the b/(b+h)b/(b+h)b/(b+h) quantile of the empirical distribution.

R. Levi, G. Perakis and J. Uichanco, The Data-Driven Newsvendor Problem: New Bounds and Insights (Operations Research 63(6), 2015), ask how many samples guarantee that the SAA order is ϵ\epsilonϵ-optimal with high probability. Levi, Roundy and Shmoys (2007) gave a distribution-free bound. Levi, Perakis and Uichanco show that, asymptotically in ϵ\epsilonϵ, the right measure of difficulty is a single scalar of the demand law, the weighted mean spread at the critical quantile, and that for the class of log-concave demand distributions (normal, uniform, exponential, logistic, Laplace and many others used in inventory theory) this scalar is bounded below by min⁡(b,h)/(b+h)\min(b,h)/(b+h)min(b,h)/(b+h). That uniform bound turns a distribution-dependent sample-size guarantee into one that holds for every log-concave demand, and is markedly tighter than the distribution-free one.

This mission formalizes the bound (Proposition 2) and the chain of lemmas the paper uses to prove it. The source is the authors' accepted manuscript of the paper (MIT DSpace), cited by its own page numbers.

Setting

Fix costs b>0b>0b>0, h>0h>0h>0 and the critical ratio β=b/(b+h)∈(0,1)\beta=b/(b+h)\in(0,1)β=b/(b+h)∈(0,1). A demand law is given by a probability density f:R→Rf:\mathbb R\to\mathbb Rf:R→R: measurable, nonnegative, with ∫f=1\int f=1∫f=1. Its cdf is F(t)=∫(−∞,t]fF(t)=\int_{(-\infty,t]}fF(t)=∫(−∞,t]​f, and its β\betaβ quantile is

q∗=inf⁡{q:F(q)≥β}.q^*=\inf\{q : F(q)\ge \beta\}.q∗=inf{q:F(q)≥β}.

The absolute mean spread (AMS, Definition 1) at ttt is the gap between the conditional means above and below ttt,

Δ(t)=E(D∣D≥t)−E(D∣D≤t)=∫[t,∞)xf(x) dx1−F(t)−∫(−∞,t]xf(x) dxF(t),\Delta(t)=E(D\mid D\ge t)-E(D\mid D\le t)=\frac{\int_{[t,\infty)}x f(x)\,dx}{1-F(t)}-\frac{\int_{(-\infty,t]}x f(x)\,dx}{F(t)},Δ(t)=E(D∣D≥t)−E(D∣D≤t)=1−F(t)∫[t,∞)​xf(x)dx​−F(t)∫(−∞,t]​xf(x)dx​,

and the weighted mean spread (WMS, Definition 2) is Δ(q∗)f(q∗)\Delta(q^*)f(q^*)Δ(q∗)f(q∗).

A density is log-concave (Definition 3) if log⁡f\log flogf is concave on its support. Equivalently, f(x)af(y)1−a≤f(ax+(1−a)y)f(x)^a f(y)^{1-a}\le f(ax+(1-a)y)f(x)af(y)1−a≤f(ax+(1−a)y) for all x,yx,yx,y and a∈[0,1]a\in[0,1]a∈[0,1]; this form allows fff to vanish outside an interval.

For a log-concave fff and a point ttt with f(t)>0f(t)>0f(t)>0, the number γ1\gamma_1γ1​ is a supergradient of log⁡f\log flogf at ttt, written γ1∈∂log⁡f(t)\gamma_1\in\partial\log f(t)γ1​∈∂logf(t), if log⁡f(x)≤log⁡f(t)+γ1(x−t)\log f(x)\le\log f(t)+\gamma_1(x-t)logf(x)≤logf(t)+γ1​(x−t) for all xxx with f(x)>0f(x)>0f(x)>0. The paper splits the class L\mathbb LL of log-concave densities into the subclasses Lq∗,γ0,γ1\mathbb L_{q^*,\gamma_0,\gamma_1}Lq∗,γ0​,γ1​​ of densities with quantile q∗q^*q∗, f(q∗)=γ0f(q^*)=\gamma_0f(q∗)=γ0​ and γ1∈∂log⁡f(q∗)\gamma_1\in\partial\log f(q^*)γ1​∈∂logf(q∗), and minimizes the AMS over each subclass (problem (11)). The minimizer is the truncated exponential density

f~(x)=γ0eγ1(x−q∗)  on [x‾,x‾],x‾=q∗+1γ1log⁡ ⁣(1−γ1γ0β),x‾=q∗+1γ1log⁡ ⁣(1+γ1γ0(1−β)),\tilde f(x)=\gamma_0e^{\gamma_1(x-q^*)}\ \text{ on }[\underline x,\overline x],\qquad \underline x=q^*+\tfrac1{\gamma_1}\log\!\big(1-\tfrac{\gamma_1}{\gamma_0}\beta\big),\quad \overline x=q^*+\tfrac1{\gamma_1}\log\!\big(1+\tfrac{\gamma_1}{\gamma_0}(1-\beta)\big),f~​(x)=γ0​eγ1​(x−q∗)  on [x​,x],x​=q∗+γ1​1​log(1−γ0​γ1​​β),x=q∗+γ1​1​log(1+γ0​γ1​​(1−β)),

and zero elsewhere (display (12)), with AMS zq∗,γ0,γ1∗z^*_{q^*,\gamma_0,\gamma_1}zq∗,γ0​,γ1​∗​ in closed form.

The Lean development uses the names IsPdf, cdfOf, quantileOf, ams, IsLogSupergradient, tildeF and zStar for these objects, in the namespace DataDrivenNV.WMS.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 2

For every log-concave density fff,

Δ(q∗) f(q∗) ≥ min⁡(b,h)b+h.\Delta(q^*)\,f(q^*)\ \ge\ \frac{\min(b,h)}{b+h}.Δ(q∗)f(q∗) ≥ b+hmin(b,h)​.

The statement has no further hypothesis: no moment condition, no continuity, no restriction on γ0,γ1\gamma_0,\gamma_1γ0​,γ1​.

Milestones, in the order of the paper's proof

  1. Lemma 1: at the quantile, −b+hh≤γ1γ0≤b+hb-\frac{b+h}{h}\le\frac{\gamma_1}{\gamma_0}\le\frac{b+h}{b}−hb+h​≤γ0​γ1​​≤bb+h​.
  2. Lemma 2: f(x)≤γ0eγ1(x−t)f(x)\le\gamma_0e^{\gamma_1(x-t)}f(x)≤γ0​eγ1​(x−t) for every xxx.
  3. Lemma 3 (Domination Lemma): a density dominated on the support of another, with the same mass left of ttt, has the larger AMS at ttt.
  4. Proposition 1: f~\tilde ff~​ belongs to Lq,γ0,γ1\mathbb L_{q,\gamma_0,\gamma_1}Lq,γ0​,γ1​​ and minimizes the AMS there.
  5. The closed form: Δf~(q)=zq,γ0,γ1∗=γ0γ12[(b+hh+γ1γ0)log⁡(1+γ1γ0hb+h)+(b+hb−γ1γ0)log⁡(1−γ1γ0bb+h)]\Delta_{\tilde f}(q)=z^*_{q,\gamma_0,\gamma_1}=\frac{\gamma_0}{\gamma_1^2}\big[(\frac{b+h}{h}+\frac{\gamma_1}{\gamma_0})\log(1+\frac{\gamma_1}{\gamma_0}\frac{h}{b+h})+(\frac{b+h}{b}-\frac{\gamma_1}{\gamma_0})\log(1-\frac{\gamma_1}{\gamma_0}\frac{b}{b+h})\big]Δf~​​(q)=zq,γ0​,γ1​∗​=γ12​γ0​​[(hb+h​+γ0​γ1​​)log(1+γ0​γ1​​b+hh​)+(bb+h​−γ0​γ1​​)log(1−γ0​γ1​​b+hb​)].
  6. Lemma 4: three elementary inequalities in β∈(0,1)\beta\in(0,1)β∈(0,1) and η∈(−11−β,1β)\eta\in(-\frac1{1-\beta},\frac1\beta)η∈(−1−β1​,β1​).

Significance

The proposition is what makes the paper's log-concave sample-size bound (Theorem 4) parameter-free: the probability that the biased SAA order is ϵ\epsilonϵ-optimal is, asymptotically, at least 1−2exp⁡(−14Nϵ Δ(q∗)f(q∗))1-2\exp(-\frac14N\epsilon\,\Delta(q^*)f(q^*))1−2exp(−41​NϵΔ(q∗)f(q∗)) (Theorem 3), and Proposition 2 replaces the unknown Δ(q∗)f(q∗)\Delta(q^*)f(q^*)Δ(q∗)f(q∗) by min⁡(b,h)/(b+h)\min(b,h)/(b+h)min(b,h)/(b+h). A manager who only knows that demand is log-concave can then size a sample without estimating any parameter of the law.

The result is proved in the paper; nothing about it is open. As far as is known it has no machine-checked proof. Formalizing it produces a checked lower bound for an inventory-theory quantity together with reusable facts about log-concave densities on the line: exponential envelopes from a supergradient, the quantile-and-slope constraints of Lemma 1, and the comparison of conditional means behind the Domination Lemma.

Difficulty

The definitions are elementary, but the proof passes through an infinite-dimensional optimization problem over a class of densities. The obvious first step, "the AMS is minimized by the most concentrated density", has no direct meaning without fixing the density value and the slope of log⁡f\log flogf at the quantile; after fixing them, one needs the envelope of Lemma 2, a stochastic comparison (Lemma 3) and an explicit integral of a truncated exponential. The Domination Lemma as printed is false (a density whose support has a gap to the right of ttt is a counterexample), so it is formalized under the hypothesis that the dominating density is positive exactly on an interval around ttt, which is how Proposition 1 uses it. The case γ1=0\gamma_1=0γ1​=0 (uniform minimizer) and the two boundary values of γ1/γ0\gamma_1/\gamma_0γ1​/γ0​ (one-sided exponential minimizers) are not covered by the closed form (12) and must be handled separately in a proof of the goal. Finally, Lemma 1 rests on the monotonicity of the failure rate f/(1−F)f/(1-F)f/(1−F) and the reversed hazard rate f/Ff/Ff/F of log-concave laws, which must be proved from log-concavity.

Formalization scope

Densities are functions ℝ → ℝ with IsPdf f (measurable, nonnegative everywhere, integrable, total integral 1); the law of DDD is never introduced separately. Log-concavity is the published definition ConvexOptimization.LogConcaveOn Set.univ f (power form, zeros allowed). Concavity of Real.log ∘ f is not used, because Real.log 0 = 0 would treat log⁡f\log flogf as 000 off the support. The quantile is an sInf; for β∈(0,1)\beta\in(0,1)β∈(0,1) its defining set is nonempty and bounded below. The AMS is the difference of two ratios of integrals. At the quantile both denominators are positive, and the goal and Proposition 1 assume no integrability of xf(x)xf(x)xf(x), since log-concave densities have exponential tails. The value f(q∗)f(q^*)f(q∗) is taken pointwise; q∗q^*q∗ lies in the interior of the support, where a log-concave density is continuous.

Conventions and disclosed departures from the page:

  • "γ1∈∂log⁡f\gamma_1\in\partial\log fγ1​∈∂logf, the set of all subgradients" is read as the superdifferential of the concave log⁡f\log flogf on {f>0}\{f>0\}{f>0}.
  • Lemma 3 carries three added hypotheses: f2f_2f2​ vanishes outside some [l,u]∋t[l,u]\ni t[l,u]∋t and is positive on (l,u)(l,u)(l,u); 0<F1(t)<10<F_1(t)<10<F1​(t)<1; and xf1(x)xf_1(x)xf1​(x), xf2(x)xf_2(x)xf2​(x) are integrable. The first repairs the printed statement; the other two are the conditions under which Definition 1 makes sense for general densities.
  • Proposition 1 and the closed form of z∗z^*z∗ are stated for γ1≠0\gamma_1\neq0γ1​=0 and γ1/γ0\gamma_1/\gamma_0γ1​/γ0​ strictly inside the interval of Lemma 1, where (12) is a finite interval.
  • The goal has no such restriction.

Assumption 1 of the paper (monotonicity of fff beyond q∗q^*q∗) and the continuity assumption of §3 are hypotheses of Theorems 3–4 only and are not used here. A formalization in which f(q∗)f(q^*)f(q∗) or Δ(q∗)\Delta(q^*)Δ(q∗) takes a junk value (a non-integrable xf(x)xf(x)xf(x), a zero denominator) would make the goal trivially true or false; the hypotheses above exclude this, and no statement assumes the conclusion of another.

Contributions welcome: proofs of the milestones in any order; general lemmas on log-concave densities on R\mathbb RR (exponential tails, integrability of moments, monotone hazard rates, continuity in the interior of the support); and the boundary cases of problem (11).

Selected references

  • R. Levi, G. Perakis, J. Uichanco, The Data-Driven Newsvendor Problem: New Bounds and Insights, Operations Research 63(6):1294–1306, 2015. Authors' accepted manuscript, MIT DSpace. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.2015.1422
  • R. Levi, R. O. Roundy, D. B. Shmoys, Provably Near-Optimal Sampling-Based Policies for Stochastic Inventory Control Models, Mathematics of Operations Research 32(4):821–839, 2007. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.1070.0272
9 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Algorithmic Game TheoryFunctional Analysis·Captain: mikedeng1

Existence of Correlated Equilibria III: A Game with Compact Hausdorff Strategy Spaces and Continuous Payoffs Has a Countably Additive Correlated EquilibriumResearch Paper

Motivation

A correlated equilibrium (Aumann 1974) describes play in a game where a mediator draws a profile of recommended actions from a joint distribution and tells each player only that player's own recommendation; the distribution is an equilibrium when no player gains, on average, by departing from the recommendation. Correlated equilibria are the natural outcome of regret-minimizing learning dynamics and the solution concept underlying much of algorithmic game theory, so it matters in which games they are guaranteed to exist.

For finite games existence follows from Nash's theorem, since every Nash equilibrium is a correlated one. Hart and Schmeidler (1989) gave a direct proof based on linear duality, with no fixed-point theorem, and then extended it beyond finite games. This mission formalizes the last and most general of their three existence theorems: games with arbitrarily many players whose strategy spaces are compact Hausdorff spaces.

Timeline.

  • 1952: Fan and Glicksberg prove fixed-point theorems that yield Nash equilibria, hence correlated equilibria, for continuous games on compact strategy spaces.
  • 1969: Peleg proves existence of Nash equilibria for games with infinitely many players, finite strategy sets and continuous payoffs.
  • 1974: Aumann introduces correlated equilibria (J. Math. Econ. 1).
  • 1987: Aumann characterizes correlated equilibrium as Bayesian rationality (Econometrica 55).
  • 1989: Hart and Schmeidler prove existence of correlated equilibria by a separation argument: Theorem 1 for finite games, Theorem 2 for infinitely many players with finite strategy sets, Theorem 3 for compact Hausdorff strategy spaces (Math. Oper. Res. 14).

Setting

A game consists of a nonempty set NNN of players, possibly uncountable; for each player i∈Ni\in Ni∈N a nonempty set SiS^iSi of pure strategies; and for each player a payoff function hi:S→Rh^i:S\to\mathbb Rhi:S→R on the set of strategy profiles S=∏j∈NSjS=\prod_{j\in N}S^jS=∏j∈N​Sj. For a profile sss and a strategy ti∈Sit^i\in S^iti∈Si, (s−i,ti)(s^{-i},t^i)(s−i,ti) denotes the profile obtained from sss by replacing player iii's coordinate with tit^iti; thus hi(s)=hi(s−i,si)h^i(s)=h^i(s^{-i},s^i)hi(s)=hi(s−i,si).

In this mission each SiS^iSi is a compact Hausdorff space with its Borel σ-algebra Σi\Sigma^iΣi, the profile space SSS carries the product topology, and Σ\SigmaΣ is the Borel σ-algebra of SSS. The product σ-algebra Σ0\Sigma_0Σ0​ generated by the Σi\Sigma^iΣi is contained in Σ\SigmaΣ, and the inclusion may be strict when SSS is not metrizable (the paper's footnote 13).

Let ppp be a probability measure on (S,Σ)(S,\Sigma)(S,Σ). Think of ppp as the mediator's distribution; player iii learns the coordinate sis^isi of the drawn profile. A deviation of player iii is a Σi\Sigma^iΣi-measurable map ζi:Si→Si\zeta^i:S^i\to S^iζi:Si→Si that replaces each recommendation by an action. The measure ppp is a correlated equilibrium with respect to {Σi}i∈N\{\Sigma^i\}_{i\in N}{Σi}i∈N​ and Σ\SigmaΣ when, for every player iii and every deviation ζi\zeta^iζi,

∫S[hi(s−i,si)−hi(s−i,ζi(si))] dp(s) ≥ 0.(4)\int_S\bigl[h^i(s^{-i},s^i)-h^i\bigl(s^{-i},\zeta^i(s^i)\bigr)\bigr]\,dp(s)\ \ge\ 0 . \tag{4}∫S​[hi(s−i,si)−hi(s−i,ζi(si))]dp(s) ≥ 0.(4)

The left side is the expected gain from obeying the recommendation instead of following ζi\zeta^iζi.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3

If every SiS^iSi is compact Hausdorff and every hih^ihi is continuous on SSS with the product topology, then

∃ p probability measure on (S,Σ) such that (4) holds for all i∈N and all Σi-measurable ζi.\exists\, p\ \text{probability measure on } (S,\Sigma)\ \text{such that (4) holds for all } i\in N \text{ and all } \Sigma^i\text{-measurable } \zeta^i .∃p probability measure on (S,Σ) such that (4) holds for all i∈N and all Σi-measurable ζi.

"Countably additive" in the paper's statement is automatic: ppp is a measure.

Milestones, in the order of the proof

  1. Every f-set game has a correlated equilibrium. An f-set is a product T=∏iTiT=\prod_iT^iT=∏i​Ti of finite nonempty sets Ti⊆SiT^i\subseteq S^iTi⊆Si with TiT^iTi a singleton for all but finitely many iii; the game ΓT\Gamma_TΓT​ restricts each player to TiT^iTi, and its correlated equilibrium qTq_TqT​ is a finitely supported probability on SSS.
  2. On a compact Hausdorff space, every net of probability measures has a regular probability measure as a cluster point for the topology induced by the continuous functions.
  3. For a regular probability ppp on SSS and a Borel set Ri⊆SiR^i\subseteq S^iRi⊆Si, there are a closed Fi⊆RiF^i\subseteq R^iFi⊆Ri and an open Gi⊇RiG^i\supseteq R^iGi⊇Ri with p((Gi∖Fi)×S−i)<εp\bigl((G^i\setminus F^i)\times S^{-i}\bigr)<\varepsilonp((Gi∖Fi)×S−i)<ε: the marginal of a regular measure is regular.
  4. The special case. A regular cluster point ppp of the qTq_TqT​ satisfies (4) for every deviation that equals a fixed tit^iti on a Borel set RiR^iRi and the identity elsewhere.
  5. For continuous hih^ihi and ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0, SiS^iSi has a finite Borel partition A1,…,AKA_1,\dots,A_KA1​,…,AK​ with ∣hi(s−i,a)−hi(s−i,b)∣<ε|h^i(s^{-i},a)-h^i(s^{-i},b)|<\varepsilon∣hi(s−i,a)−hi(s−i,b)∣<ε for a,ba,ba,b in the same piece and every s−is^{-i}s−i.
  6. The general case. If (4) holds for all deviations of the special form, it holds for every Borel deviation.

An optional milestone records the remark on p. 23 that, for a finite strategy set SiS^iSi, condition (4) for player iii is equivalent to the earlier condition (3), one inequality per recommendation rir^iri and alternative tit^iti.

Significance

The result. Theorem 3 guarantees correlated equilibria, with a genuine (countably additive) probability measure, in every continuous game on compact strategy spaces, however many players there are. It also justifies taking Σ\SigmaΣ to be the full Borel σ-algebra rather than the smaller product σ-algebra, so that every Borel-measurable deviation rule is allowed. Nash existence under the same hypotheses (Fan 1952, Glicksberg 1952) implies existence of correlated equilibria too, but through a fixed-point theorem; the proof here uses only finite-dimensional duality and compactness.

Formalizing it. The theorem is classical and its proof is published; nothing here is open. To our knowledge no machine-checked proof of Theorem 3, or of any existence result for correlated equilibria in infinite games, exists. Finite-game existence results are on the platform (AGT.nash_existence; the correlated-equilibrium encodings of Aumann 1987 and Foster and Vohra 1997, and AGT.swap_regret_correlated_equilibrium). The formalization would add reusable measure-theoretic tools on compact products: the regular cluster point of a net of probability measures, the regularity of marginals, and uniform partitions for continuous functions on a product.

Difficulty

The obvious argument is the one that proves Theorem 2: approximate the game by finite games ΓT\Gamma_TΓT​, take correlated equilibria qTq_TqT​, extract a weak-* cluster point ppp, and pass the inequalities of ΓT\Gamma_TΓT​ to the limit. Passing to the limit works only for integrands that are continuous in sss, because ppp is a cluster point against continuous functions only. The integrand of (4) is hi(s)−hi(s−i,ζi(si))h^i(s)-h^i(s^{-i},\zeta^i(s^i))hi(s)−hi(s−i,ζi(si)), and ζi\zeta^iζi is merely Borel measurable, so this integrand need not be continuous and the limit step fails. Restricting to continuous deviations would avoid the difficulty but would prove a weaker theorem. Two further points need care: on a non-metrizable product the Borel σ-algebra is larger than the product σ-algebra, and the f-sets ordered by inclusion are not a directed set.

Formalization scope

The profile space is a type synonym Profile S of ∀ i, S i carrying the product topology and the instance borel (Profile S), so measures on SSS live on the Borel σ-algebra Σ\SigmaΣ and not on Mathlib's product σ-algebra MeasurableSpace.pi (=Σ0=\Sigma_0=Σ0​). The pair (s−i,ti)(s^{-i},t^i)(s−i,ti) is Function.update s i t. Players form a type ι with Nonempty ι; each S i is nonempty, compact and Hausdorff with BorelSpace (S i); payoffs are h : ι → Profile S → ℝ with each h i continuous. Deviations are all maps ζ : S i → S i with Measurable ζ.

The predicate IsCorrelatedEq h μ requires IsProbabilityMeasure μ and, for each player and measurable deviation, both integrability of the integrand and nonnegativity of its integral. The integrability clause prevents a trivializing reading in which a non-integrable integrand, whose Lean integral is 000, satisfies (4) vacuously; restricting deviations to continuous maps, or using the product σ-algebra, would also change the theorem and is ruled out.

The f-set net is indexed by the f-sets containing a fixed profile s^\hat ss^, which are directed; the paper's "ordered by inclusion of the sets TTT" over all f-sets is not directed, and anchoring repairs this without affecting any statement of the paper. A correlated equilibrium qTq_TqT​ of ΓT\Gamma_TΓT​ is encoded by its finite support and weights (IsFSetCE). The special case is stated for a regular cluster point of the qTq_TqT​ given by these constructed objects, not for an arbitrary measure.

A complete development needs Banach–Alaoglu or the compactness of probability measures on a compact space, the Riesz–Markov–Kakutani representation (RealRMK), regularity of measures (Measure.Regular), Urysohn's lemma, and uniform continuity on compact spaces, all available in Mathlib in some form. Proofs of any milestone, including the general-purpose milestones 2, 3 and 5, are welcome.

Selected references

  • S. Hart and D. Schmeidler, Existence of Correlated Equilibria, Mathematics of Operations Research 14(1), 18–25, 1989. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.14.1.18
  • R. J. Aumann, Subjectivity and Correlation in Randomized Strategies, Journal of Mathematical Economics 1, 67–96, 1974. https://doi.org/10.1016/0304-4068(74)90037-8
  • R. J. Aumann, Correlated Equilibrium as an Expression of Bayesian Rationality, Econometrica 55(1), 1–18, 1987. https://doi.org/10.2307/1911154
  • B. Peleg, Equilibrium Points for Games with Infinitely Many Players, Journal of the London Mathematical Society s1-44, 292–294, 1969. https://doi.org/10.1112/jlms/s1-44.1.292
  • I. L. Glicksberg, A Further Generalization of the Kakutani Fixed Point Theorem, with Application to Nash Equilibrium Points, Proceedings of the AMS 3, 170–174, 1952. https://doi.org/10.1090/S0002-9939-1952-0046638-5
  • K. Fan, Fixed-Point and Minimax Theorems in Locally Convex Topological Linear Spaces, PNAS 38, 121–126, 1952. https://doi.org/10.1073/pnas.38.2.121
  • N. Dunford and J. T. Schwartz, Linear Operators, Part I, Interscience, 1958.
9 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Markov ChainOperations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Contact Interactions on a Lattice I: A Contact Process with (2d − 1)λₖ < kμ Dies Out from Every Finite Initial SetResearch Paper

Motivation

The contact process is the basic model of an infection spreading on a lattice: each infected site recovers at a constant rate, and each healthy site becomes infected at a rate that depends on how many of its neighbours are infected. It was introduced by T. E. Harris in Contact Interactions on a Lattice (Ann. Probab. 2, 1974), and it became one of the central examples of interacting particle systems, alongside the voter model and the stochastic Ising model (Liggett, Interacting Particle Systems, 1985, Ch. VI). Its main question is whether a finite infection dies out with probability one or survives forever with positive probability, and how that answer depends on the rates.

Harris's paper gives the first answers. It shows that, under natural conditions on the rates, the probability of survival is monotone, subadditive and submodular as a function of the initial set, and it uses these properties to prove a condition for certain extinction: Theorem 7.1. For the linear contact process (recovery rate 111, infection rate λ\lambdaλ per infected neighbour) the condition is (2d−1)λ<1(2d-1)\lambda<1(2d−1)λ<1. Holley obtained Theorem 7.1 by different methods at about the same time (footnote 4, p. 981); Holley and Liggett (Ann. Probab. 3, 1975) later developed the duality theory of such processes.

Setting

Let ZdZ_dZd​ be the ddd-dimensional integer lattice, d≥1d\ge1d≥1. Sites x,yx,yx,y are neighbours, x∼yx\sim yx∼y, if ∑i∣xi−yi∣=1\sum_i|x^i-y^i|=1∑i​∣xi−yi∣=1; NxN_xNx​ is the set of the 2d2d2d neighbours of xxx. A configuration is a finite set ξ⊂Zd\xi\subset Z_dξ⊂Zd​ of infected sites; Ξ0\Xi_0Ξ0​ is the set of all of them, ξ(Nx)=∣ξ∩Nx∣\xi(N_x)=|\xi\cap N_x|ξ(Nx​)=∣ξ∩Nx​∣, and x∼ξx\sim\xix∼ξ means x∉ξx\notin\xix∈/ξ and xxx has a neighbour in ξ\xiξ.

The parameters are a recovery rate μ≥0\mu\ge0μ≥0 and infection rates λ0=0,λ1,…,λ2d≥0\lambda_0=0,\lambda_1,\dots,\lambda_{2d}\ge0λ0​=0,λ1​,…,λ2d​≥0. The contact process {ξt}\{\xi_t\}{ξt​} started from a finite set is the continuous-time Markov chain on Ξ0\Xi_0Ξ0​ that leaves ξ\xiξ at rate

qξ=μ∣ξ∣+∑x∼ξλξ(Nx)(4.4)q_\xi=\mu|\xi|+\sum_{x\sim\xi}\lambda_{\xi(N_x)}\qquad(4.4)qξ​=μ∣ξ∣+x∼ξ∑​λξ(Nx​)​(4.4)

and jumps to ξ∖x\xi\setminus xξ∖x (x∈ξx\in\xix∈ξ) at rate μ\muμ and to ξ∪x\xi\cup xξ∪x (x∼ξx\sim\xix∼ξ) at rate λξ(Nx)\lambda_{\xi(N_x)}λξ(Nx​)​ (4.5). The empty set is absorbing. Write Pt(ξ,η)P_t(\xi,\eta)Pt​(ξ,η) for its transition function, r(ξ,η)=qξη/qξr(\xi,\eta)=q_{\xi\eta}/q_\xir(ξ,η)=qξη​/qξ​ for the transition matrix of its imbedded jump chain, and

pt(ξ)=Pξ{ξt≠∅},p∞(ξ)=lim⁡t→∞pt(ξ),mt(ξ)=Eξ∣ξt∣.p_t(\xi)=P_\xi\{\xi_t\neq\varnothing\},\qquad p_\infty(\xi)=\lim_{t\to\infty}p_t(\xi),\qquad m_t(\xi)=\mathscr E_\xi|\xi_t| .pt​(ξ)=Pξ​{ξt​=∅},p∞​(ξ)=t→∞lim​pt​(ξ),mt​(ξ)=Eξ​∣ξt​∣.

The process is increasing, subadditive or submodular if, for all ξ,η\xi,\etaξ,η and t≥0t\ge0t≥0, respectively pt(ξ)≤pt(ξ∪η)p_t(\xi)\le p_t(\xi\cup\eta)pt​(ξ)≤pt​(ξ∪η), pt(ξ∪η)≤pt(ξ)+pt(η)p_t(\xi\cup\eta)\le p_t(\xi)+p_t(\eta)pt​(ξ∪η)≤pt​(ξ)+pt​(η), or pt(ξ∪η)+pt(ξ∩η)≤pt(ξ)+pt(η)p_t(\xi\cup\eta)+p_t(\xi\cap\eta)\le p_t(\xi)+p_t(\eta)pt​(ξ∪η)+pt​(ξ∩η)≤pt​(ξ)+pt​(η) ((5.2)–(5.4)).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 7.1 (p. 981)

If

(2d−1)λk<kμ,k=1,…,2d,(2d-1)\lambda_k<k\mu,\qquad k=1,\dots,2d,(2d−1)λk​<kμ,k=1,…,2d,

then

p∞(ξ)=0for every finite ξ⊂Zd.p_\infty(\xi)=0\qquad\text{for every finite }\xi\subset Z_d .p∞​(ξ)=0for every finite ξ⊂Zd​.

Milestones, in the order of the paper

  1. Theorem 4.3 (p. 975): from a finite set the process has finitely many jumps on every [0,t][0,t][0,t]; equivalently ∑ηPt(ξ,η)=1\sum_\eta P_t(\xi,\eta)=1∑η​Pt​(ξ,η)=1.
  2. (5.1) (p. 976): pt(ξ)p_t(\xi)pt​(ξ) is non-increasing in ttt, so p∞(ξ)p_\infty(\xi)p∞​(ξ) is a limit.
  3. Theorem 5.6(a) (p. 977): if λk↑\lambda_k\uparrowλk​↑, the process is increasing.
  4. Theorem 5.6(b) (p. 977): if moreover λk/k↓\lambda_k/k\downarrowλk​/k↓, it is subadditive.
  5. Lemma 5.8 (p. 978): if λk≤min⁡j≥kλj′\lambda_k\le\min_{j\ge k}\lambda'_jλk​≤minj≥k​λj′​, then pt≤pt′p_t\le p'_tpt​≤pt′​ and mt≤mt′m_t\le m'_tmt​≤mt′​.
  6. Theorem 6.2 (p. 979): if {λi}\{\lambda_i\}{λi​} is concave and non-decreasing with λ0=0\lambda_0=0λ0​=0, the process is submodular.
  7. Change of time scale (p. 981): multiplying all rates by c>0c>0c>0 replaces PtP_tPt​ by PctP_{ct}Pct​ and leaves p∞p_\inftyp∞​ unchanged.
  8. First-step display (p. 981): for a subadditive process, a singleton {x}\{x\}{x}, and n≥1n\ge1n≥1, p∞({x})=∑ηr(n)({x},η)p∞(η)≤p∞({x}) Ex∣ξ(n)∣p_\infty(\{x\})=\sum_\eta r^{(n)}(\{x\},\eta)p_\infty(\eta)\le p_\infty(\{x\})\,\mathscr E_x|\xi_{(n)}|p∞​({x})=∑η​r(n)({x},η)p∞​(η)≤p∞​({x})Ex​∣ξ(n)​∣.
  9. (7.2) (p. 981): for μ=1\mu=1μ=1, λk=kλ\lambda_k=k\lambdaλk​=kλ: π1=2dλ1+2dλπ2\pi_1=\frac{2d\lambda}{1+2d\lambda}\pi_2π1​=1+2dλ2dλ​π2​, where π1,π2\pi_1,\pi_2π1​,π2​ are p∞p_\inftyp∞​ of a site and of a pair of neighbours.
  10. (7.3)–(7.4) (p. 981): π2−π1=(1+(2d−1)λ)∑′r(ξ,ξ∪x)(p∞(ξ∪x)−π2)≤(π2−π1)(2d−1)λ\pi_2-\pi_1=(1+(2d-1)\lambda)\sum'r(\xi,\xi\cup x)(p_\infty(\xi\cup x)-\pi_2)\le(\pi_2-\pi_1)(2d-1)\lambdaπ2​−π1​=(1+(2d−1)λ)∑′r(ξ,ξ∪x)(p∞​(ξ∪x)−π2​)≤(π2​−π1​)(2d−1)λ.
  11. Conclusion of the proof (p. 981): for μ=1\mu=1μ=1, λk=kλ\lambda_k=k\lambdaλk​=kλ, π1>0\pi_1>0π1​>0 implies (2d−1)λ≥1(2d-1)\lambda\ge1(2d−1)λ≥1.

Significance

Theorem 7.1 gives a computable sufficient condition for extinction that holds in every dimension and for every non-linear infection law satisfying it. For the linear process it gives the lower bound λc≥1/(2d−1)\lambda_c\ge1/(2d-1)λc​≥1/(2d−1) on the critical infection rate; the paper's §9 shows conversely that the process survives for large λk/μ\lambda_k/\muλk​/μ, so the critical rate is non-trivial. The monotonicity, subadditivity and submodularity theorems of §§5–6 are the comparison tools on which much of the later theory of attractive spin systems was built, and Lemma 5.8 is the prototype of comparison between processes with ordered rates.

The results are proved in the paper, and the proof of Theorem 7.1 is half a page once §§5–6 are available. No machine-checked version of the contact process, of its comparison theorems, or of Theorem 7.1 is known to exist. A formalization produces a continuous-time Markov chain with unbounded rates and an absorbing state on a countable state space, its minimal transition function, a non-explosion criterion, first-step analysis for absorption probabilities, and coupling arguments for monotone comparison. The companion mission Contact Interactions on a Lattice II treats Theorem 7.6, the integrability of the expected size, on the same model.

Difficulty

The obvious argument is first-step analysis on singletons and pairs, (7.2) and (7.3). It fails as it stands because (7.3) involves p∞p_\inftyp∞​ of every three-point set ξ∪x\xi\cup xξ∪x, and no finite system of first-step equations closes; some inequality between survival probabilities of nested sets is needed, and the milestones record the one the paper uses. Submodularity, subadditivity and monotonicity are not consequences of the rates by direct computation: the paper proves each by building several contact processes on one probability space (Tables 1–4), which in a formal development means constructing couplings of chains with unbounded rates and checking that each marginal has the right law. The reduction from general λk\lambda_kλk​ to the linear case also needs the comparison Lemma 5.8, another coupling. Finally the rates grow linearly in ∣ξ∣|\xi|∣ξ∣, so uniformization does not apply and non-explosion (Theorem 4.3) must be proved before transition probabilities are known to sum to one.

Formalization scope

The process is the countable-state chain of §4, not the Feller process on all subsets of ZdZ_dZd​ of §2: sites are Fin d → ℤ, configurations are Finsets, and PtP_tPt​ is the minimal transition function of the rates (4.4)–(4.5), defined as the increasing limit of Feller's backward recursion. There is no measure-theoretic process object; PξP_\xiPξ​ and Eξ\mathscr E_\xiEξ​ enter only through PtP_tPt​. Consequently Theorem 4.1 (Ξ0\Xi_0Ξ0​ is stochastically closed) is built in, and every statement is made for finite initial sets, including those the page makes for arbitrary ξ∈Ξ\xi\in\Xiξ∈Ξ ((5.2)–(5.4), Lemma 5.8); for infinite ξ\xiξ the page itself notes pt(ξ)=1p_t(\xi)=1pt​(ξ)=1.

The committed conventions:

  • PtP_tPt​, ptp_tpt​, p∞p_\inftyp∞​ and mtm_tmt​ take values in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]; pt(ξ)=1−Pt(ξ,∅)p_t(\xi)=1-P_t(\xi,\varnothing)pt​(ξ)=1−Pt​(ξ,∅) and p∞(ξ)=inf⁡t≥0pt(ξ)p_\infty(\xi)=\inf_{t\ge0}p_t(\xi)p∞​(ξ)=inft≥0​pt​(ξ), so p∞=0p_\infty=0p∞​=0 means absorption at ∅\varnothing∅ and cannot be produced by loss of mass to explosion.
  • The rates are real; every theorem assumes d≥1d\ge1d≥1, μ≥0\mu\ge0μ≥0, λ0=0\lambda_0=0λ0​=0 and λk≥0\lambda_k\ge0λk​≥0 for k≤2dk\le2dk≤2d. Conditions on {λk}\{\lambda_k\}{λk​} range over k=1,…,2dk=1,\dots,2dk=1,…,2d (or 0,…,2d0,\dots,2d0,…,2d), never over all natural numbers.
  • 2d−12d-12d−1 is the real number 2d−12d-12d−1.
  • In the linear case the scalar rate is written lll (λ\lambdaλ is reserved in Lean), μ=1\mu=1μ=1 and λk=kl\lambda_k=klλk​=kl.

Trivializing formalizations are ruled out: the survival probability is not taken from an arbitrary semigroup or a uniformization (the rates are unbounded); p∞p_\inftyp∞​ is not a real infimum or limUnder, whose junk value 000 would make the goal free; λ\lambdaλ is indexed by the number of infected, not vacant, neighbours, and λ0=0\lambda_0=0λ0​=0 forbids spontaneous infection; and (7.2) is stated for every site and every neighbour, not for one fixed pair.

A complete development needs: non-explosion for chains with linearly growing rates; the Chapman–Kolmogorov and strong Markov properties of the minimal chain at jump times; lattice symmetries (translations and coordinate reflections) acting on the chain; and couplings of several contact processes realised as one chain on a product type space. The chain infrastructure and the coupling lemmas are reusable beyond this mission, in particular by its companion. Contributions to any milestone are welcome, including proofs of the milestones under the paper's hypotheses by methods other than Harris's.

Selected references

  • T. E. Harris, Contact interactions on a lattice, The Annals of Probability 2(6), 969–988, 1974. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176996493
  • R. Holley and T. M. Liggett, Ergodic theorems for weakly interacting infinite systems and the voter model, The Annals of Probability 3(4), 643–663, 1975. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176996306
  • T. M. Liggett, Interacting Particle Systems, Grundlehren 276, Springer, 1985. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4613-8542-4
  • W. Feller, On the integro-differential equations of purely discontinuous Markoff processes, Transactions of the AMS 48, 488–515, 1940. https://doi.org/10.1090/S0002-9947-1940-0002697-3
  • J. R. Norris, Markov Chains, Cambridge University Press, 1997, §2.8. https://doi.org/10.1017/CBO9780511810633
13 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Heavy-Traffic Limits for Queues with Many Exponential Servers: The Scaled Stationary M/M/n Queue Length Converges to a Hybrid Exponential–Normal LawResearch Paper

Why many-server queues in heavy traffic

Telephone exchanges, call centers, hospital wards and cloud server pools are queues with a large number sss of parallel servers. For such systems two classical approximations pull in opposite directions. Holding sss fixed and letting the traffic intensity ρ→1\rho \to 1ρ→1 gives the conventional heavy-traffic limit, in which almost every customer waits. Letting sss grow with ρ\rhoρ fixed below one gives a limit in which almost nobody waits. Real systems sit in between: a positive fraction of customers wait, and waits are short. Halfin and Whitt (Operations Research 29 (1981) 567–588) identified the scaling that produces this middle regime and the limit laws it yields. The scaling is now called the Halfin–Whitt or quality-and-efficiency-driven (QED) regime, and it underlies square-root staffing: run n≈R+βRn \approx R + \beta\sqrt Rn≈R+βR​ servers for an offered load of RRR Erlangs. Borst, Mandelbaum and Reiman (Operations Research 52 (2004) 17–34) built staffing rules for large call centers on it.

Timeline. Erlang (1917) gave the delay probability of the M/M/s queue. Iglehart (1965) proved diffusion limits for M/M/s queues with the number of servers growing and the traffic intensity fixed. Halfin and Whitt (1981) proved that the delay probability has a limit strictly between 0 and 1 exactly when (1−ρn)n(1-\rho_n)\sqrt n(1−ρn​)n​ converges to a positive constant (their Proposition 1), derived the limit of the stationary queue length (Theorem 1), and extended the process-level limit to GI/M/s queues. Later work extended the regime to many-server queues with general service times and abandonment.

Setting

An M/M/s queue has Poisson arrivals at rate λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0, s≥1s \ge 1s≥1 servers, and exponential service times with rate μ>0\mu > 0μ>0. Its traffic intensity is ρ=λ/(sμ)\rho = \lambda/(s\mu)ρ=λ/(sμ). The number Q(t)Q(t)Q(t) of customers in the system (waiting or in service) is a birth–death process on {0,1,2,… }\{0,1,2,\dots\}{0,1,2,…} with birth rate λ\lambdaλ and death rate min⁡(k,s)μ\min(k,s)\mumin(k,s)μ in state kkk. When ρ<1\rho < 1ρ<1, Q(t)Q(t)Q(t) converges in distribution to Q(∞)Q(\infty)Q(∞), whose law pk=P(Q(∞)=k)p_k = P(Q(\infty) = k)pk​=P(Q(∞)=k) is the unique probability distribution solving the balance equations of this chain. The probability of delay α=P(Q(∞)≥s)\alpha = P(Q(\infty) \ge s)α=P(Q(∞)≥s) is the Erlang-C formula.

The mission studies a sequence of such queues: queue n≥1n \ge 1n≥1 has sn=ns_n = nsn​=n servers, the fixed service rate μ\muμ, and arrival rate λn\lambda_nλn​ with ρn=λn/(nμ)<1\rho_n = \lambda_n/(n\mu) < 1ρn​=λn​/(nμ)<1 and λn→∞\lambda_n \to \inftyλn​→∞. Its stationary queue length is Qn(∞)Q_n(\infty)Qn​(∞), and the scaled queue length is

Xn=Qn(∞)−nn.X_n = \frac{Q_n(\infty) - n}{\sqrt n}.Xn​=n​Qn​(∞)−n​.

Throughout, Φ\PhiΦ and φ\varphiφ denote the standard normal distribution function and density, and for β>0\beta > 0β>0

α(β)=[1+2π β Φ(β) eβ2/2]−1=φ(β)φ(β)+βΦ(β)∈(0,1).\alpha(\beta) = \big[1 + \sqrt{2\pi}\,\beta\,\Phi(\beta)\,e^{\beta^2/2}\big]^{-1} = \frac{\varphi(\beta)}{\varphi(\beta) + \beta\Phi(\beta)} \in (0,1).α(β)=[1+2π​βΦ(β)eβ2/2]−1=φ(β)+βΦ(β)φ(β)​∈(0,1).

The standing assumption of the paper's Section 2 is the heavy-traffic condition

lim⁡n→∞(1−ρn)n=β,β>0.(2.2)\lim_{n\to\infty} (1-\rho_n)\sqrt n = \beta, \qquad \beta > 0. \tag{2.2}n→∞lim​(1−ρn​)n​=β,β>0.(2.2)

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1

Under (2.2), with α=α(β)\alpha = \alpha(\beta)α=α(β),

Xn⇒X,P(X≥0)=α,P(X>x∣X≥0)=e−xβ (x≥0),P(X≤x∣X≤0)=Φ(β+x)Φ(β) (x≤0).X_n \Rightarrow X, \qquad P(X \ge 0) = \alpha,\quad P(X > x \mid X \ge 0) = e^{-x\beta}\ (x \ge 0),\quad P(X \le x \mid X \le 0) = \frac{\Phi(\beta + x)}{\Phi(\beta)}\ (x \le 0).Xn​⇒X,P(X≥0)=α,P(X>x∣X≥0)=e−xβ (x≥0),P(X≤x∣X≤0)=Φ(β)Φ(β+x)​ (x≤0).

The limit is exponential with rate β\betaβ above zero and a normal law truncated at zero below it, with masses α\alphaα and 1−α1-\alpha1−α.

Milestones, in the order the paper proves them

  1. The stationary law (1.1)–(1.3) of one M/M/s queue, and the identification (1.2) of P(Q(∞)≥s)P(Q(\infty) \ge s)P(Q(∞)≥s) with the Erlang-C formula.
  2. Lemma 1: recursions expressing the partial moments ∑k<skmpk\sum_{k<s} k^m p_k∑k<s​kmpk​ and ∑k≥skmpk\sum_{k \ge s} k^m p_k∑k≥s​kmpk​ through lower ones and α\alphaα.
  3. Proposition 1: P(Qn(∞)≥n)→α∈(0,1)P(Q_n(\infty) \ge n) \to \alpha \in (0,1)P(Qn​(∞)≥n)→α∈(0,1) if and only if (2.2) holds, and then α=α(β)\alpha = \alpha(\beta)α=α(β).
  4. Proposition 2: for δ>0\delta > 0δ>0 and (n−δn)/n→δ(n - \delta_n)/\sqrt n \to \delta(n−δn​)/n​→δ with δn≤n\delta_n \le nδn​≤n,
P(Qn(∞)≤δn∣Qn(∞)≤n)→Φ(β−δ)Φ(β),n P(Qn(∞)=[δn]∣Qn(∞)≤n)→φ(β−δ)Φ(β),P(Q_n(\infty) \le \delta_n \mid Q_n(\infty) \le n) \to \frac{\Phi(\beta-\delta)}{\Phi(\beta)},\qquad \sqrt n\,P(Q_n(\infty) = [\delta_n] \mid Q_n(\infty) \le n) \to \frac{\varphi(\beta-\delta)}{\Phi(\beta)},P(Qn​(∞)≤δn​∣Qn​(∞)≤n)→Φ(β)Φ(β−δ)​,n​P(Qn​(∞)=[δn​]∣Qn​(∞)≤n)→Φ(β)φ(β−δ)​,

and for (δn−n)/n→δ(\delta_n - n)/\sqrt n \to \delta(δn​−n)/n​→δ with δn≥n\delta_n \ge nδn​≥n,

P(Qn(∞)≥δn∣Qn(∞)≥n)→e−δβ,n P(Qn(∞)=[δn]∣Qn(∞)≥n)→βe−δβ.P(Q_n(\infty) \ge \delta_n \mid Q_n(\infty) \ge n) \to e^{-\delta\beta},\qquad \sqrt n\,P(Q_n(\infty) = [\delta_n] \mid Q_n(\infty) \ge n) \to \beta e^{-\delta\beta}.P(Qn​(∞)≥δn​∣Qn​(∞)≥n)→e−δβ,n​P(Qn​(∞)=[δn​]∣Qn​(∞)≥n)→βe−δβ.
  1. Corollary 1: the first four moments and the variance of XnX_nXn​ converge to explicit functions of α\alphaα and β\betaβ, for example EXn→−β+α/βE X_n \to -\beta + \alpha/\betaEXn​→−β+α/β.

Significance

Theorem 1 is the stationary half of the Halfin–Whitt regime. It turns the Erlang-C formula, a ratio of sums with nnn terms that is opaque for large nnn, into a two-parameter description of congestion: α\alphaα is the fraction of customers who wait, β\betaβ is the scaled safety margin of servers, and the conditional laws above give the distribution of the number waiting and of the number of idle servers. Proposition 1 and Theorem 1 are what square-root staffing rules evaluate; Corollary 1 supplies the mean and variance used in the paper's numerical approximations.

All results of this mission are proved in the paper, by direct calculation from (1.1)–(1.3), Stirling's formula and the central limit theorem for Poisson variables. None has a machine-checked proof. Proposition 1 and the two Section 1 facts are posed on the platform as open theorems from the Gross et al. queueing textbook series; this mission adds the conditional and local limits, the weak-convergence theorem and the moment results on the same definitions, so that a closed development would give a fully checked derivation of the Halfin–Whitt limit from the balance equations.

Difficulty

The stationary law is explicit, so nothing here needs a stochastic process. The difficulty is analytic and uniform: each statement is a limit of ratios of sums of nnn or infinitely many terms, (nρn)k/k!(n\rho_n)^k/k!(nρn​)k/k! below nnn and a geometric tail above nnn, in which ρn→1\rho_n \to 1ρn​→1 and n→∞n \to \inftyn→∞ at linked rates. The lower half needs a central limit theorem for Poisson laws whose parameter nρnn\rho_nnρn​ moves with nnn and is evaluated at a moving point; the local limits (2.10) and (2.12) need Stirling's formula with explicit control of log⁡ρn\log \rho_nlogρn​ to second order. Weak convergence then needs tightness, or a direct argument from the conditional limits, and the moment limits need uniform integrability, which the fixed-sss moment recursions do not give by themselves. Holding ρ\rhoρ fixed, or taking limits in nnn and ρ\rhoρ one after the other, gives degenerate answers (α=0\alpha = 0α=0 or α=1\alpha = 1α=1); the two limits must be taken together.

Formalization scope

The Lean development lives in the namespace HalfinWhitt81.Stationary. The law of Qn(∞)Q_n(\infty)Qn​(∞) is a sequence p n : ℕ → ℝ satisfying IsSteadyState (fun _ => lam n) (mmcDeath μ n) (p n) of the referenced definition QueueingFundamentals.BirthDeath.Balance (nonnegative, summing to one, solving the balance equations of the M/M/n chain); the Erlang-C formula and α(β)\alpha(\beta)α(β) are erlangC and halfinWhittAlpha of QueueingFundamentals.BirthDeath.Erlang, and Φ\PhiΦ, φ\varphiφ are Mathlib's cdf (gaussianReal 0 1) and gaussianPDFReal 0 1. These, and the three open theorems for (1.1)–(1.3), (1.2) and Proposition 1, come from the Gross et al. (2008) series and are referenced, not restated. The related Borst–Mandelbaum–Reiman items (DimCallCenters.*.lemma_4_1, for the continuous extension of Erlang-C) state a different result and are not used.

Conventions committed to:

  • hypotheses on queue nnn (rates, steady state, δn≤n\delta_n \le nδn​≤n or δn≥n\delta_n \ge nδn​≥n) are imposed for n≥1n \ge 1n≥1, and only limits are asserted; λn→∞\lambda_n \to \inftyλn​→∞ is kept as a hypothesis although it follows from (2.2);
  • the standing assumption "(2.1) or, equivalently, (2.2)" is the hypothesis (2.2) with β>0\beta > 0β>0, and α\alphaα is written as α(β)\alpha(\beta)α(β), equal to the limit in (2.1) by Proposition 1;
  • probabilities of Qn(∞)Q_n(\infty)Qn​(∞) are sums of p n (probLE, probGE, probEqInt); a conditional probability P(A∣B)P(A \mid B)P(A∣B) with A⊆BA \subseteq BA⊆B is the ratio P(A)/P(B)P(A)/P(B)P(A)/P(B); [x][x][x] is Int.floor, with P(Q=m)=0P(Q = m) = 0P(Q=m)=0 for m<0m < 0m<0;
  • XnX_nXn​ uses n−1/2n^{-1/2}n−1/2: the page's (2.13) prints n1/2n^{1/2}n1/2, a misprint; (2.12) prints the limit βe−β\beta e^{-\beta}βe−β, a misprint for βe−δβ\beta e^{-\delta\beta}βe−δβ, which is what is formalized;
  • "Xn⇒XX_n \Rightarrow XXn​⇒X" is stated as: there is a Borel probability measure ν\nuν on R\mathbb RR with the three properties of Theorem 1 such that ∑kpn(k) g((k−n)/n)→∫g dν\sum_k p_n(k)\,g((k-n)/\sqrt n) \to \int g\,d\nu∑k​pn​(k)g((k−n)/n​)→∫gdν for every bounded continuous ggg; the exponential clause is for x≥0x \ge 0x≥0 and the normal clause for x≤0x \le 0x≤0;
  • infinite sums whose convergence is not implied by the hypotheses (the moment series of Lemma 1 and Corollary 1) have their convergence in the conclusion.

The goal cannot be met trivially: the law of Qn(∞)Q_n(\infty)Qn​(∞) is the M/M/n steady state, not a free sequence; the limit measure is asserted to exist together with its three properties and the convergence, so no vacuous "for every ν\nuν" reading is possible; and the statement P(Xn≥0)→αP(X_n \ge 0) \to \alphaP(Xn​≥0)→α alone is Proposition 1, already posed.

A complete development needs: the closed form of the M/M/n steady state, Poisson central limit and local limit theorems with a moving parameter, Stirling's formula with error terms, a criterion for weak convergence from convergence of distribution functions, and uniform integrability for the moments. The Poisson limit theorems and the weak-convergence criterion are reusable beyond this mission. Proofs of the referenced open theorems, of individual milestones, and alternative routes to Theorem 1 (moment convergence, or the process-level limit) are all welcome.

Selected references

  • S. Halfin and W. Whitt, Heavy-Traffic Limits for Queues with Many Exponential Servers, Operations Research 29(3) (1981) 567–588. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.29.3.567
  • R. B. Cooper, Introduction to Queueing Theory, Macmillan, 1972 (the source cited for (1.1)–(1.3)).
  • D. L. Iglehart, Limiting Diffusion Approximations for the Many Server Queue and the Repairman Problem, Journal of Applied Probability 2(2) (1965) 429–441.
  • S. Borst, A. Mandelbaum and M. I. Reiman, Dimensioning Large Call Centers, Operations Research 52(1) (2004) 17–34. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.1030.0081
  • D. Gross, J. F. Shortle, J. M. Thompson and C. M. Harris, Fundamentals of Queueing Theory, 4th ed., Wiley, 2008 (§2.4: the Erlang-C formula and the Halfin–Whitt limit).
13 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Dynamical SystemsOperations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Subadditive Ergodic Theory 1: Kingman's Theorem — x₀ₜ/t Converges with Probability One and in Mean to a Finite ξ with E(ξ) = γResearch Paper

Motivation

Many stochastic systems have an accumulated cost or passage time that grows with the length of an observation window. Splitting a window at an intermediate time gives an upper bound on the total, even when it does not give an equality. First-passage percolation and products of random matrices are examples discussed by Kingman (1973). A central question is whether the cost per unit time settles to a long-run rate on almost every sample path.

Hammersley and Welsh introduced subadditive stochastic processes in 1965. Kingman's 1968 theorem established the almost-sure limit for the stationary process considered here. His 1973 paper restated the result, identified the limit's expectation, and set out the process model and related formulations used in later applications. The 1973 article explicitly attributes the proof of Theorem 1, its maximal inequality, and its decomposition to the 1968 work; this mission formalizes the statements as presented in the 1973 paper.

Setting

Fix a probability space (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P). For integers 0≤s<t0\le s<t0≤s<t, let xst:Ω→Rx_{st}:\Omega\to\mathbb Rxst​:Ω→R be a measurable random variable. Think of xstx_{st}xst​ as the accumulated quantity over the interval from sss to ttt. Condition S₁ is subadditivity: xsu≤xst+xtux_{su}\le x_{st}+x_{tu}xsu​≤xst​+xtu​ whenever s<t<us<t<us<t<u. The stronger equality defines an additive process.

Condition S₂ says that shifting every interval one time unit forward leaves the joint distribution of the whole family unchanged. It concerns the law of (xs+1,t+1)s<t(x_{s+1,t+1})_{s<t}(xs+1,t+1​)s<t​ as a single countable path. The one-dimensional statement that each xstx_{st}xst​ has a distribution depending only on t−st-st−s is called S₂′ in the paper; it does not replace S₂. Condition S₃ says that every positive-time variable x0tx_{0t}x0t​ is integrable and that, for some real AAA, its mean gt=EP(x0t)g_t=E_P(x_{0t})gt​=EP​(x0t​) satisfies gt≥−Atg_t\ge-Atgt​≥−At for all t≥1t\ge1t≥1. A subadditive process satisfies S₁, S₂, and S₃.

The associated mean growth rate is γ(x)=inf⁡t≥1gt/t\gamma(x)=\inf_{t\ge1}g_t/tγ(x)=inft≥1​gt​/t. The time index starts at one in this infimum because division by zero would introduce an unrelated value. S₃ gives a finite lower bound; the subadditive mean relation makes this infimum the limit of gt/tg_t/tgt​/t. Kingman also considers the invariant σ-field I\mathcal II: events determined by the entire path and unchanged by the shift (xst)↦(xs+1,t+1)(x_{st})\mapsto(x_{s+1,t+1})(xst​)↦(xs+1,t+1​). It records the part of the process that can remain random in the limiting rate. Source: §§1.1–1.2, pp. 883–885.

Formalization targets

Theorem 1: finite long-run rate

For every subadditive process there is an integrable real random variable ξ\xiξ such that

x0t(ω)t⟶ξ(ω)for P-almost every ω,∫Ω∣x0tt−ξ∣ dP⟶0,EP(ξ)=γ(x).\frac{x_{0t}(\omega)}{t}\longrightarrow\xi(\omega) \quad\text{for }P\text{-almost every }\omega, \qquad \int_\Omega\left|\frac{x_{0t}}{t}-\xi\right|\,dP\longrightarrow0, \qquad E_P(\xi)=\gamma(x).tx0t​(ω)​⟶ξ(ω)for P-almost every ω,∫Ω​​tx0t​​−ξ​dP⟶0,EP​(ξ)=γ(x).

These are three distinct claims: almost-sure convergence, convergence in mean, and an identity for the limit's expectation. The limit need not be a constant. The milestone list also covers the convergence of the means, the maximal inequality (1.2.5), the decomposition (1.2.6), the measure-preserving formulation (1.3.4)–(1.3.5), and the representation through I\mathcal II in (1.2.4). Each statement comes from the 1973 paper, §§1.1–1.3.

Measure-preserving formulation

For a measure-preserving map θ:Ω→Ω\theta:\Omega\to\Omegaθ:Ω→Ω, condition Sᴱ concerns integrable functions fnf_nfn​ with fm+n(ω)≤fm(ω)+fn(θmω)f_{m+n}(\omega)\le f_m(\omega)+f_n(\theta^m\omega)fm+n​(ω)≤fm​(ω)+fn​(θmω) for m,n≥1m,n\ge1m,n≥1 and a linear lower bound on their expectations. It yields an integrable ξ\xiξ with fn/n→ξf_n/n\to\xifn​/n→ξ almost surely and in mean. Neither invertibility nor ergodicity of θ\thetaθ is assumed. Source: §1.3, p. 886.

Significance

The theorem assigns a finite sample-path growth rate to an entire class of stationary subadditive systems. It also ties the average of that rate to the infimum of the normalized expected values. The equality is useful when a system's finite-window means are easier to estimate than its individual long-run paths. The invariant σ-field statement explains why a stationary system can have different rates on different paths without contradicting the mean identity. Kingman's examples show how the same framework reaches percolation and matrix products.

The result is mathematically proved, as the 1973 article states. The remaining work here is a machine-checked development of its process model and the displayed results. A published Prove2Me item, PalmQueueing.Ergodic.kingman_subadditive, is open and concerns an ergodic bijective flow with a constant possibly infinite limit; it does not supply this nonergodic finite-limit theorem or convergence in mean. The draft statements in this mission compile with proof placeholders. No machine-checked proof of these new statements is claimed.

Difficulty

Subadditivity gives bounds when intervals are joined, but it does not express x0tx_{0t}x0t​ as a sum of identically distributed increments. The ordinary additive ergodic theorem therefore does not immediately give convergence for x0t/tx_{0t}/tx0t​/t. Nor does convergence of the expectations gt/tg_t/tgt​/t alone force convergence on individual paths or in mean. The process may also have a nonconstant limit: stationarity is a joint-law condition, not an ergodicity assumption that erases invariant information. These are the gaps the formalization must close without strengthening the hypotheses. Source: §§1.1–1.3.

Formalization scope

Lean represents xxx as a function of two natural-number indices and a sample point, but every condition and conclusion uses only s<ts<ts<t. S₁ and the Sᴱ cocycle inequality follow the paper's pointwise displays; random-variable equality in the decomposition is stated almost surely at each valid index pair. Measurability of each valid coordinate is explicit. S₂ compares two probability measures on the full countable path space, so equality of individual marginals cannot satisfy it. The probability measure is normalized, and S₃ requires Bochner integrability to keep every mean finite. The constant γ\gammaγ is a real infimum over positive times, used only under S₃. The goal's limit is real and integrable; Kingman's separate Theorem 2 treats a possible value of −∞-\infty−∞ and belongs to another mission.

The invariant σ-field is the pullback of the path-space shift-invariant σ-field. Its measurability claim is made through an almost-everywhere equal version, since almost-sure limits are insensitive to changes on null sets. Conditional expectation uses this explicit sub-σ-field. All limits in this mission take positive integer time to infinity. The Sᴱ definition requires measure preservation but no inverse and no ergodicity. Thus neither a marginal-law substitution for S₂ nor an ergodic constant-limit specialization can trivialize the target.

A complete proof can reuse Mathlib's measure theory, conditional expectation, product measurable spaces, measure-preserving maps, and subadditive-sequence results. The two process definitions, the invariant σ-field interface, and auxiliary statements are useful to later formalizations of stationary growth models. Contributions that prove the stated results or develop general-purpose lemmas for these objects fit the mission.

Selected references

  • J. F. C. Kingman, Subadditive ergodic theory, The Annals of Probability 1(6), 883–899, 1973. DOI: 10.1214/aop/1176996798.
8 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Statistics·Captain: mikedeng1

On Tail Probabilities for Martingales 3: If E exp[−e(λ)W] ≤ e^{−λa} and E exp[−f(λ)W] ≥ e^{−λ(a+1)} for All λ ≥ 0, Then P{W < b} > ½ exp[−(½ + 2δ)a²/b]Research Paper

Motivation

Freedman's inequality bounds the probability that a martingale with increments bounded above by 111 reaches a level aaa before its accumulated conditional variance exceeds bbb: the bound is exp⁡[−a2/2(a+b)]\exp[-a^2/2(a+b)]exp[−a2/2(a+b)] (D. A. Freedman, On Tail Probabilities for Martingales, Ann. Probab. 3 (1975) 100–118, Theorem (4.1), doi:10.1214/aop/1176996452). It is the standard tool for concentration of martingales whose variance is random, and it is used throughout online learning, bandit theory and the analysis of randomized algorithms.

The same paper shows that the exponent a2/2ba^2/2ba2/2b cannot be improved in general. For a martingale with increments bounded by 111 in absolute value, Freedman's estimate (1.10) bounds from below the probability that level aaa is crossed while the conditional variance used is still below bbb. The analytic core of that lower bound is isolated in the paper as Proposition (4.10), p. 109: a statement about a single nonnegative random variable whose Laplace transform is controlled from both sides. The paper calls its proof "disappointingly hard". This mission formalizes Proposition (4.10) and the steps of its proof.

Setting

Let (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) be a probability space. For real λ\lambdaλ put (Definition (1.2), p. 101)

e(λ)=eλ−1−λ,f(λ)=e−λ−1+λ.e(\lambda)=e^{\lambda}-1-\lambda,\qquad f(\lambda)=e^{-\lambda}-1+\lambda .e(λ)=eλ−1−λ,f(λ)=e−λ−1+λ.

Both are nonnegative and equal λ2/2+O(λ3)\lambda^2/2+O(\lambda^3)λ2/2+O(λ3) near 000. Fix a>0a>0a>0 and a nonnegative random variable WWW. The two Laplace-transform bounds are, for every λ≥0\lambda\ge0λ≥0,

(4.11a)E{exp⁡[−e(λ)W]}≤exp⁡(−λa),(4.11b)E{exp⁡[−f(λ)W]}≥exp⁡(−λ(a+1)).\text{(4.11a)}\quad E\{\exp[-e(\lambda)W]\}\le\exp(-\lambda a),\qquad \text{(4.11b)}\quad E\{\exp[-f(\lambda)W]\}\ge\exp(-\lambda(a+1)).(4.11a)E{exp[−e(λ)W]}≤exp(−λa),(4.11b)E{exp[−f(λ)W]}≥exp(−λ(a+1)).

In the paper W=WaW=W_aW=Wa​ is the conditional variance ∑i≤τaVar⁡{Xi∣Fi−1}\sum_{i\le\tau_a}\operatorname{Var}\{X_i\mid\mathcal F_{i-1}\}∑i≤τa​​Var{Xi​∣Fi−1​} accumulated up to the first time τa\tau_aτa​ the martingale reaches aaa; for that variable (4.11a) and (4.11b) are Theorems (1.12) and (1.8). Here WWW is abstract. The hypotheses are consistent: the first-passage time of standard Brownian motion to level aaa has Ee−sW=e−a2sE e^{-sW}=e^{-a\sqrt{2s}}Ee−sW=e−a2s​, and since f(λ)≤λ2/2≤e(λ)f(\lambda)\le\lambda^2/2\le e(\lambda)f(λ)≤λ2/2≤e(λ) for λ≥0\lambda\ge0λ≥0, it satisfies both bounds.

The parameter conditions (4.12) on positive reals δ,a,b\delta,a,bδ,a,b are

δ<13,ba>9δ2,a2b>16δ2log⁡64δ2.\delta<\tfrac13,\qquad \frac ba>\frac{9}{\delta^2},\qquad \frac{a^2}{b}>\frac{16}{\delta^2}\log\frac{64}{\delta^2}.δ<31​,ab​>δ29​,ba2​>δ216​logδ264​.

The proof uses the notation (4.14): φ(λ)=λ2/2−λ3/6\varphi(\lambda)=\lambda^2/2-\lambda^3/6φ(λ)=λ2/2−λ3/6, λ=(1+δ)a/b\lambda=(1+\delta)a/bλ=(1+δ)a/b, k=a2/bk=a^2/bk=a2/b, N=2/δ2N=2/\delta^2N=2/δ2, the five intervals I1=[0,Na]I_1=[0,Na]I1​=[0,Na], I2=(Na,(1−2δ)b]I_2=(Na,(1-2\delta)b]I2​=(Na,(1−2δ)b], I3=(b,2b]I_3=(b,2b]I3​=(b,2b], I4=(2b,∞)I_4=(2b,\infty)I4​=(2b,∞), I5=((1−2δ)b,b]I_5=((1-2\delta)b,b]I5​=((1−2δ)b,b], and the terms

ηi=φ(λ)∫IiP{W<x} e−φ(λ)x dx.\eta_i=\varphi(\lambda)\int_{I_i}P\{W<x\}\,e^{-\varphi(\lambda)x}\,dx .ηi​=φ(λ)∫Ii​​P{W<x}e−φ(λ)xdx.

In Lean these objects are FreedmanTail.LowerTail.e, f, LaplaceUpper, LaplaceLower, ParamConditions, phi, lamStar, kStar, NStar, I1–I5 and eta.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition (4.10)

Under (4.11a)–(4.11b) for all λ≥0\lambda\ge0λ≥0 and (4.12a)–(4.12c),

P{W<b}>12exp⁡ ⁣[−(12+2δ)a2b].(4.13)P\{W<b\}>\tfrac12\exp\!\left[-\left(\tfrac12+2\delta\right)\frac{a^2}{b}\right].\qquad(4.13)P{W<b}>21​exp[−(21​+2δ)ba2​].(4.13)

Milestones

In the order of the proof:

  1. Lemma (4.9): α>0\alpha>0α>0, x>2log⁡αx>2\log\alphax>2logα imply ex>αxe^x>\alpha xex>αx.
  2. (4.17): exp⁡(−δ2k/8)<1/(8k)\exp(-\delta^2k/8)<1/(8k)exp(−δ2k/8)<1/(8k) under (4.12).
  3. (4.18): under (4.11a), P{W<x}<exp⁡[−a2/(2(a+x))]P\{W<x\}<\exp[-a^2/(2(a+x))]P{W<x}<exp[−a2/(2(a+x))] for x≥0x\ge0x≥0.
  4. (4.15): under (4.11b) and (4.12), φ(λ)∫0∞P{W<x}e−φ(λ)x dx>exp⁡[−λ(a+1)]\varphi(\lambda)\int_0^\infty P\{W<x\}e^{-\varphi(\lambda)x}\,dx>\exp[-\lambda(a+1)]φ(λ)∫0∞​P{W<x}e−φ(λ)xdx>exp[−λ(a+1)].
  5. (4.19), with its exponent corrected: P{W<x}<(18−150)exp⁡[−(1+δ)k]P\{W<x\}<(\tfrac18-\tfrac1{50})\exp[-(1+\delta)k]P{W<x}<(81​−501​)exp[−(1+δ)k] for 0≤x≤Na0\le x\le Na0≤x≤Na.
  6. (4.16:1)–(4.16:4): η1<(18−150)e−(1+δ)k\eta_1<(\tfrac18-\tfrac1{50})e^{-(1+\delta)k}η1​<(81​−501​)e−(1+δ)k and ηi<18e−(1+δ)k\eta_i<\tfrac18e^{-(1+\delta)k}ηi​<81​e−(1+δ)k for i=2,3,4i=2,3,4i=2,3,4.
  7. (4.16:5): η5<P{W<b}⋅exp⁡[(−12+2δ2)k]\eta_5<P\{W<b\}\cdot\exp[(-\tfrac12+2\delta^2)k]η5​<P{W<b}⋅exp[(−21​+2δ2)k].

Significance

The result. Proposition (4.10) converts two-sided control of a Laplace transform into a lower bound for a left tail, with an explicit constant and an explicit range of validity. Applied to the crossing variance WaW_aWa​ it gives Freedman's lower bound (1.10) for P{Wa<b}P\{W_a<b\}P{Wa​<b}, which matches the exponent a2/(2b)a^2/(2b)a2/(2b) of the upper bound of Theorem (4.1) up to the term 2δa2/b2\delta a^2/b2δa2/b. That is the statement that Freedman's inequality is sharp in the regime a2/b→∞a^2/b\to\inftya2/b→∞, b/a→∞b/a\to\inftyb/a→∞.

Formalizing it. The proposition is proved in the 1975 paper; no machine-checked proof is known. Mathlib contains Chernoff-type upper bounds and the layer-cake formula, but no lower tail bound derived from two-sided Laplace-transform control. The mission produces a self-contained, constant-explicit Tauberian-type lemma for nonnegative random variables, usable without any martingale structure. The companion missions of this series formalize Theorem (4.1) and the Laplace bound (1.8); together they would give the sharpness statement for martingales.

Difficulty

The obvious route is to invert the Laplace-transform bounds directly. A lower bound on E{e−sW}E\{e^{-sW}\}E{e−sW} does not by itself bound P{W<b}P\{W<b\}P{W<b} from below: the mass that makes the Laplace transform large could sit at small values of WWW or be spread over a wide range. Without (4.11a) the conclusion fails, and with it every contribution from values of WWW away from bbb must be shown negligible at a precision of order e−(1+δ)ke^{-(1+\delta)k}e−(1+δ)k, where k=a2/bk=a^2/bk=a2/b is large. The main term is smaller than the total by the factor e−k/2e^{-k/2}e−k/2, so every error term must be estimated with constants explicit enough to stay below it. The thresholds (4.12b)–(4.12c) are what make all of these comparisons hold at once.

Formalization scope

The probability space is a measurable space Ω with a measure P and [IsProbabilityMeasure P]. WWW is a measurable function Ω → ℝ with W ω ≥ 0 for every ω. The expectations in (4.11) are Bochner integrals of exp⁡[−e(λ)W]\exp[-e(\lambda)W]exp[−e(λ)W] and exp⁡[−f(λ)W]\exp[-f(\lambda)W]exp[−f(λ)W]; for λ≥0\lambda\ge0λ≥0 these integrands lie in (0,1](0,1](0,1], so they are integrable and the integrals are genuine expectations. Probabilities are P.real {ω | W ω < x}, with the strict event as on the page. The integrals in xxx are Lebesgue integrals over [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) and over the intervals IiI_iIi​; the integrand is a nondecreasing function of xxx times e−φ(λ)xe^{-\varphi(\lambda)x}e−φ(λ)x, hence measurable and, as φ(λ)>0\varphi(\lambda)>0φ(λ)>0, integrable.

Conventions and corrections, each also disclosed in the items:

  • The page says "for each a>0a>0a>0, let WaW_aWa​ be a nonnegative random variable"; only the one variable at the one level aaa of (4.12) enters, so the statement is made for a fixed aaa and a single WWW.
  • (4.14) prints φ(λ)=λ2/2>λ3/6\varphi(\lambda)=\lambda^2/2>\lambda^3/6φ(λ)=λ2/2>λ3/6; this is read as φ(λ)=λ2/2−λ3/6\varphi(\lambda)=\lambda^2/2-\lambda^3/6φ(λ)=λ2/2−λ3/6, as the rest of the proof requires.
  • (4.19) prints θ=(18−150)exp⁡[−(1+δ)]\theta=(\tfrac18-\tfrac1{50})\exp[-(1+\delta)]θ=(81​−501​)exp[−(1+δ)]; the milestone states θ=(18−150)exp⁡[−(1+δ)k]\theta=(\tfrac18-\tfrac1{50})\exp[-(1+\delta)k]θ=(81​−501​)exp[−(1+δ)k], which is what the page's argument proves and what (4.16:1) needs.
  • (4.18) is stated for every x≥0x\ge0x≥0, the range on which it is used.
  • The proof of (4.16:5) ends "This settles (3.16:5)", a misprint for (4.16:5).

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the hypotheses are satisfied by the Brownian first-passage time above, the parameter conditions hold for instance at δ=0.3\delta=0.3δ=0.3, a=106a=10^6a=106, b=2⋅108b=2\cdot10^8b=2⋅108, and no integral in a hypothesis or conclusion can take a default value 000.

Needed infrastructure: Markov's inequality and the layer-cake formula (both in Mathlib), the identity E{e−sW}=s∫0∞P{W<x}e−sx dxE\{e^{-sW}\}=s\int_0^\infty P\{W<x\}e^{-sx}\,dxE{e−sW}=s∫0∞​P{W<x}e−sxdx for W≥0W\ge0W≥0, and elementary estimates of exe^xex and of the convex function θ(x)=λ22x+NN+1a22x\theta(x)=\tfrac{\lambda^2}2x+\tfrac{N}{N+1}\tfrac{a^2}{2x}θ(x)=2λ2​x+N+1N​2xa2​ of (4.21). The layer-cake identity and the left-tail bound (4.18) are reusable beyond this mission. Proofs of any milestone are welcome, as are proofs of the unnumbered steps (4.20)–(4.30).

The source is the published article in The Annals of Probability (a scanned copy); page numbers are the journal's.

Selected references

  • D. A. Freedman, On Tail Probabilities for Martingales, The Annals of Probability 3(1) (1975) 100–118. doi:10.1214/aop/1176996452
14 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Statistics·Captain: mikedeng1

On Tail Probabilities for Martingales 1: If X_n ≤ 1 and E{X_n | ℱ_{n−1}} ≤ 0, Then P{S_n ≥ a and T_n ≤ b for Some n} ≤ (b/(a+b))^{a+b} e^a ≤ exp[−a²/2(a+b)]Research Paper

Motivation

For sums of independent bounded random variables, the inequalities of Bernstein and Bennett bound the probability of a large deviation by an exponential in the deviation and the variance (Bennett 1962; Hoeffding 1963). Many processes met in probability, statistics and learning theory are not sums of independent terms but martingales or supermartingales: sequential estimators, stochastic approximation iterates, the regret of an online algorithm. For them the relevant scale is not a fixed variance but the conditional variance accumulated along the path, which is itself random.

David A. Freedman's paper On Tail Probabilities for Martingales (Ann. Probab. 3 (1975) 100–118) extended the Bernstein–Bennett inequality to this dependent case, with the conditional variance in place of the variance and with a bound that holds simultaneously for all times. The result, now called Freedman's inequality, is the standard tool for martingale concentration with variance-sensitive rates and is used throughout bandit and reinforcement-learning analyses, random-graph arguments and stochastic optimization. This mission formalizes that theorem, (4.1) of the paper, together with the chain of lemmas the paper uses to prove it.

Setting

Let (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) be a probability space and F0⊂F1⊂F2⊂⋯\mathcal F_0\subset\mathcal F_1\subset\mathcal F_2\subset\cdotsF0​⊂F1​⊂F2​⊂⋯ an increasing sequence of sub-σ\sigmaσ-fields of F\mathcal FF (a filtration). Let X1,X2,…X_1,X_2,\dotsX1​,X2​,… be real random variables with XnX_nXn​ measurable with respect to Fn\mathcal F_nFn​. Define

  • the partial sums Sn=X1+⋯+XnS_n=X_1+\cdots+X_nSn​=X1​+⋯+Xn​, with S0=0S_0=0S0​=0;
  • the conditional variances Vn=Var⁡{Xn∣Fn−1}V_n=\operatorname{Var}\{X_n\mid\mathcal F_{n-1}\}Vn​=Var{Xn​∣Fn−1​};
  • the intrinsic time Tn=V1+⋯+VnT_n=V_1+\cdots+V_nTn​=V1​+⋯+Vn​, with T0=0T_0=0T0​=0.

Freedman treats TnT_nTn​ as an intrinsic clock: read at time TnT_nTn​ rather than nnn, the process SnS_nSn​ resembles Brownian motion. The paper's condition (3.4) is

Xn≤1 a.e.andE{Xn∣Fn−1}≤0 a.e.for all n≥1,X_n\le1\ \text{a.e.}\qquad\text{and}\qquad E\{X_n\mid\mathcal F_{n-1}\}\le0\ \text{a.e.}\qquad\text{for all }n\ge1,Xn​≤1 a.e.andE{Xn​∣Fn−1​}≤0 a.e.for all n≥1,

so (Sn)(S_n)(Sn​) is a supermartingale whose increments are bounded above by 111; no lower bound is assumed. The auxiliary functions are e(λ)=eλ−1−λe(\lambda)=e^\lambda-1-\lambdae(λ)=eλ−1−λ and Qλ(v,y)=exp⁡{λy−e(λ)v}Q_\lambda(v,y)=\exp\{\lambda y-e(\lambda)v\}Qλ​(v,y)=exp{λy−e(λ)v}, with time first and position second. A stopping time σ\sigmaσ takes values in {0,1,2,…,∞}\{0,1,2,\dots,\infty\}{0,1,2,…,∞} with {σ≤n}∈Fn\{\sigma\le n\}\in\mathcal F_n{σ≤n}∈Fn​, and P{σ=∞}>0P\{\sigma=\infty\}>0P{σ=∞}>0 is allowed.

In Lean these are FreedmanTail.Bernstein.S, V, T (on Filtration ℕ m, with V given by Mathlib's condVar) and FreedmanTail.Bernstein.e, Q.

Formalization targets

Goal: (4.1) Theorem

Under (3.4), for all a>0a>0a>0 and b>0b>0b>0,

P{Sn≥a and Tn≤b for some n=1,2,… }≤(ba+b)a+bea≤exp⁡[−a22(a+b)].P\{S_n\ge a\ \text{and}\ T_n\le b\ \text{for some } n=1,2,\dots\}\le\Bigl(\frac{b}{a+b}\Bigr)^{a+b}e^{a}\le\exp\Bigl[-\frac{a^{2}}{2(a+b)}\Bigr].P{Sn​≥a and Tn​≤b for some n=1,2,…}≤(a+bb​)a+bea≤exp[−2(a+b)a2​].

The first bound is of Bennett type, the second of Bernstein type. The event is a union over all times; the bound does not depend on any horizon.

Milestones

In the order the paper's proof uses them:

  1. (3.1) Lemma: g(0)=12g(0)=\tfrac12g(0)=21​, g(x)=(ex−1−x)/x2g(x)=(e^x-1-x)/x^2g(x)=(ex−1−x)/x2 for x≠0x\ne0x=0, is increasing.
  2. (3.2) Corollary: exp⁡(λx)≤1+λx+x2e(λ)\exp(\lambda x)\le1+\lambda x+x^2e(\lambda)exp(λx)≤1+λx+x2e(λ) for λ≥0\lambda\ge0λ≥0, x≤1x\le1x≤1.
  3. (3.5): E{exp⁡(λX)}≤1+e(λ)Var⁡X≤exp⁡[e(λ)Var⁡X]E\{\exp(\lambda X)\}\le1+e(\lambda)\operatorname{Var}X\le\exp[e(\lambda)\operatorname{Var}X]E{exp(λX)}≤1+e(λ)VarX≤exp[e(λ)VarX] for λ≥0\lambda\ge0λ≥0, X≤1X\le1X≤1, E(X)≤0E(X)\le0E(X)≤0.
  4. Proof of (3.3): {Qλ(Tn,Sn),Fn}\{Q_\lambda(T_n,S_n),\mathcal F_n\}{Qλ​(Tn​,Sn​),Fn​} is a supermartingale for λ≥0\lambda\ge0λ≥0.
  5. (3.3) Proposition: ∫{σ<∞}Qλ(Tσ,Sσ) dP≤1\int_{\{\sigma<\infty\}}Q_\lambda(T_\sigma,S_\sigma)\,dP\le1∫{σ<∞}​Qλ​(Tσ​,Sσ​)dP≤1 for every stopping time σ\sigmaσ and λ≥0\lambda\ge0λ≥0.
  6. Proof of (4.1): P{A}≤exp⁡[−λa+e(λ)b]P\{A\}\le\exp[-\lambda a+e(\lambda)b]P{A}≤exp[−λa+e(λ)b] for every λ≥0\lambda\ge0λ≥0, where AAA is the event of the goal.
  7. Proof of (4.1): λ0=log⁡[(a+b)/b]\lambda_0=\log[(a+b)/b]λ0​=log[(a+b)/b] minimizes this bound, with value (b/(a+b))a+bea(b/(a+b))^{a+b}e^a(b/(a+b))a+bea.
  8. Proof of (4.1): (b/(a+b))a+bea≤exp⁡[−a2/(2(a+b))](b/(a+b))^{a+b}e^a\le\exp[-a^2/(2(a+b))](b/(a+b))a+bea≤exp[−a2/(2(a+b))].

Significance

The inequality bounds the probability that a supermartingale ever reaches level aaa before its accumulated conditional variance exceeds bbb. Since it holds for all times at once, fixed-horizon versions follow immediately, as do versions with stopping times, and with a peeling argument over bbb it gives the variance-adaptive confidence sequences used in sequential testing and in the analysis of algorithms. Freedman's paper uses it to derive the law of the iterated logarithm for martingales; later work uses it wherever a martingale's conditional variance is much smaller than the square of its increment bound.

The theorem has been proved for fifty years. What this mission adds is a machine-checked statement and proof of the full infinite-horizon form under the one-sided hypothesis (3.4), together with the exponential supermartingale and the optional-stopping bound (3.3) as reusable lemmas. Prove2Me already has fixed-horizon Bernstein-form consequences for martingale differences; the infinite-horizon Bennett form under (3.4) does not appear in Mathlib or on the platform.

Difficulty

The naive route of applying Markov's inequality to exp⁡(λSn)\exp(\lambda S_n)exp(λSn​) at a fixed nnn gives a bound for one time only and requires a deterministic bound on TnT_nTn​. Taking a union over all nnn loses everything. The content of the theorem is that the random clock TnT_nTn​ and the supremum over time can both be absorbed, which requires an exponential process compensated by the random TnT_nTn​ and an optional-stopping bound for stopping times that may be infinite with positive probability. The process need not be uniformly integrable, and the increments have no lower bound. A second, smaller, difficulty is the variance form of (3.5): the bound uses Var⁡X\operatorname{Var}XVarX rather than E(X2)E(X^2)E(X2), which is strictly sharper when E(X)<0E(X)<0E(X)<0 and is needed to compensate with conditional variances.

Formalization scope

Lean conventions this mission commits to:

  • Increments are a sequence X : ℕ → Ω → ℝ used from index 111 (X 0 is never read), so SnS_nSn​, TnT_nTn​ and VnV_nVn​ carry the paper's indices. The filtration is Mathlib's Filtration ℕ m, and "XnX_nXn​ is Fn\mathcal F_nFn​-measurable" is StronglyMeasurable[ℱ n] (X n) for n≥1n\ge1n≥1.
  • VnV_nVn​ is Mathlib's condVar (ℱ (n - 1)) (X n) P. Mathlib sets a conditional expectation of a non-integrable function to 000, so every increment is assumed square integrable (MemLp (X n) 2 P). This is the one hypothesis added to the page. Under (3.4) the page also allows increments of infinite variance, for which its TnT_nTn​ is +∞+\infty+∞; the formalization narrows the class of processes and leaves every conclusion as printed. Milestone (3.5) likewise assumes E(X2)<∞E(X^2)<\inftyE(X2)<∞, which is the case the page reduces to.
  • "Expectation-decreasing martingale" is Mathlib's Supermartingale.
  • Stopping times are Ω → WithTop ℕ with IsStoppingTime; ⊤\top⊤ is ∞\infty∞. In (3.3) the integral over {σ<∞}\{\sigma<\infty\}{σ<∞} is a lower Lebesgue integral in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], so the bound does not presuppose integrability, and SσS_\sigmaSσ​, TσT_\sigmaTσ​ are read only on {σ≠∞}\{\sigma\ne\infty\}{σ=∞}.
  • The probability of the event "for some nnn" is the measure of {ω:∃n≥1, Sn(ω)≥a, Tn(ω)≤b}\{\omega:\exists n\ge1,\ S_n(\omega)\ge a,\ T_n(\omega)\le b\}{ω:∃n≥1, Sn​(ω)≥a, Tn​(ω)≤b}. (b/(a+b))a+b(b/(a+b))^{a+b}(b/(a+b))a+b is a real power.
  • (3.1) is stated as strict monotonicity, which its proof (g′(x)>0g'(x)>0g′(x)>0 for x≠0x\ne0x=0) establishes.

A fixed-horizon statement (n=Nn=Nn=N, or n≤Nn\le Nn≤N), a martingale hypothesis E{Xn∣Fn−1}=0E\{X_n\mid\mathcal F_{n-1}\}=0E{Xn​∣Fn−1​}=0, or a two-sided bound ∣Xn∣≤1|X_n|\le1∣Xn​∣≤1 would each be a strictly weaker theorem than (4.1) and is not an acceptable formalization of the goal.

The development needs exponential supermartingales compensated by conditional variance, optional stopping for stopping times that may be infinite, and elementary real analysis of exe^xex. The real-analysis milestones (3.1), (3.2) and the two calculus steps are independent and reusable; (3.5) is a self-contained moment-generating-function bound; the supermartingale and (3.3) are reusable for every exponential-supermartingale argument. Contributions to any milestone, and alternative proofs of the goal, are welcome.

Selected references

  • David A. Freedman, On Tail Probabilities for Martingales, The Annals of Probability 3(1) (1975), 100–118. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176996452 (source of this mission; a scanned copy of the published article, cited by printed page)
  • George Bennett, Probability Inequalities for the Sum of Independent Random Variables, Journal of the American Statistical Association 57 (1962), 33–45. https://doi.org/10.1080/01621459.1962.10482149
  • Wassily Hoeffding, Probability Inequalities for Sums of Bounded Random Variables, Journal of the American Statistical Association 58 (1963), 13–30. https://doi.org/10.1080/01621459.1963.10500830
11 thms3 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimizationStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Optimal Starting Times for End-of-Season Sales and Optimal Stopping Times for Promotional Fares 1: Markdown Is Optimal Once Time-to-Go Falls Below a Strictly Increasing Threshold x_nResearch Paper

Why the timing of a markdown matters

A seller with limited stock can charge a high price while demand is strong and lower the price before the selling season ends. The timing depends on how many units remain: a markdown that is sensible with ample stock may be premature when only one unit is left. Feng and Gallego studied this decision when each price generates a Poisson demand stream and only one price change is allowed. Their 1995 paper proves that the optimal decision has a threshold in remaining time for every inventory level. This mission formalizes their markdown theorem, including its value-function representation, rather than just the existence of a switching rule.

The model is a finite-inventory revenue problem, relevant when an unsold unit loses its value at the end of a season. It is also a continuous-time stopping problem: the seller observes actual sales and may react to them. A fixed calendar date for the markdown cannot describe all of those decisions. The paper treats the markdown case separately from the markup case, because the order of prices, arrival rates and revenue rates reverses the behavior of the switching boundary. The present mission concerns the markdown case alone.

Prices, demand, and admissible switches

Let n≥1n\ge1n≥1 be the initial stock and t≥0t\ge0t≥0 the time to go. The seller first charges price p1p_1p1​ and may change once to a lower price p2p_2p2​. Demands at the two prices are independent Poisson counts with positive rates λ1\lambda_1λ1​ and λ2\lambda_2λ2​. A lower price produces more arrivals, so p2<p1p_2<p_1p2​<p1​ and λ1<λ2\lambda_1<\lambda_2λ1​<λ2​. Feng and Gallego also assume that lowering the price increases the revenue rate: p1λ1<p2λ2p_1\lambda_1<p_2\lambda_2p1​λ1​<p2​λ2​. There is no salvage payment for inventory left when time expires. These conventions come from §2 and the case split on pp. 1375–1376.

Write N1(s)N_1(s)N1​(s) for the observed sales count at the initial price by time sss. If the price changes at deterministic time s∈[0,t]s\in[0,t]s∈[0,t], let J(n,t;s)J(n,t;s)J(n,t;s) be the expected total revenue. The count after the change is independent of N1(s)N_1(s)N1​(s), and their sum has Poisson mean λ1s+λ2(t−s)\lambda_1s+\lambda_2(t-s)λ1​s+λ2​(t−s). The optimal value J(n,t)J(n,t)J(n,t) allows the switch time τ\tauτ to depend on the counts observed so far. An admissible τ\tauτ lies between zero and ttt, is a stopping time for the history of N1N_1N1​, and occurs before stock is exhausted almost surely. At s=0s=0s=0, J(n,t;0)J(n,t;0)J(n,t;0) is the revenue from charging p2p_2p2​ immediately. The paper defines these quantities in §3, pp. 1377–1379.

Formalization targets

The goal is Theorem 1, p. 1380. It asserts a strictly increasing sequence x1<x2<⋯x_1<x_2<\cdotsx1​<x2​<⋯ of inventory-dependent thresholds. When t≤xnt\le x_nt≤xn​, switching immediately earns the optimal value; when t>xnt>x_nt>xn​, a correction F(n,t)F(n,t)F(n,t) is added:

J(n,t)={J(n,t;0),t≤xn,J(n,t;0)+F(n,t),t>xn.J(n,t)=\begin{cases} J(n,t;0),&t\le x_n,\\ J(n,t;0)+F(n,t),&t>x_n. \end{cases}J(n,t)={J(n,t;0),J(n,t;0)+F(n,t),​t≤xn​,t>xn​.​

The theorem specifies the correction, rather than leaving it as an arbitrary difference of values. It starts with F(0,t)=0F(0,t)=0F(0,t)=0. For n≥1n\ge1n≥1, set L(n,t)=G(n,t)+λ1F(n−1,t)L(n,t)=G(n,t)+\lambda_1F(n-1,t)L(n,t)=G(n,t)+λ1​F(n−1,t), where GGG is the Poisson-tail expression from §4.1. The threshold xnx_nxn​ is the first nonnegative zero of L(n,⋅)L(n,\cdot)L(n,⋅). A function H(n,⋅)H(n,\cdot)H(n,⋅) satisfies ∂tH=−λ1H+L\partial_tH=-\lambda_1H+L∂t​H=−λ1​H+L for positive time and H(n,xn)=0H(n,x_n)=0H(n,xn​)=0; FFF is zero below xnx_nxn​ and equals HHH at and above it. If yny_nyn​ is the first zero of G(n,⋅)G(n,\cdot)G(n,⋅), the theorem also gives x1=y1x_1=y_1x1​=y1​ and xn<ynx_n<y_nxn​<yn​ for n>1n>1n>1.

Three supporting targets match the source's attack path. Equation (17) differentiates immediate-switch revenue. Lemma 2 gives the zeros and one sign change of GGG in the markdown case. Lemma 1 identifies a value function through differential inequalities and its stopping payoff. Each is recorded with its page-level statement in the milestone list.

What the result provides

The threshold sequence turns an adaptive stopping problem into a state rule: inspect remaining inventory and time to go, then compare time with the corresponding threshold. The value representation supplies the expected-revenue quantity on both sides of that comparison. Strict increase means a larger stock requires a larger remaining-time threshold before charging the higher initial price is worthwhile. These are the conclusions of Theorem 1, already proved in the paper.

The work here is a Lean statement and eventual machine-checked proof of that known result. The current theorem items are open proof targets. Formalizing the model gives reusable Poisson-tail revenue expressions and a continuous-time stopping-value interface; Lemma 1 can also serve other Poisson-driven stopping problems once proved. A checked proof would establish that the threshold representation and the optimal stopping value agree under the stated assumptions, including boundary cases that informal notation leaves implicit.

Where the mathematics is difficult

The obvious comparison of two fixed switching times misses the information contained in the sales path. The switch decision can change after each observed arrival, while the threshold for inventory nnn depends on the correction at stock n−1n-1n−1. Showing that every such comparison is organized by one increasing threshold requires more than differentiating the fixed-switch revenue. The paper's appendix handles the interaction between the sign of GGG, the recursive correction, and the stopping-value verification; these are distinct formal targets pp. 1387–1388.

The printed verification lemma and one word of Lemma 2 require care. Lemma 1 omits boundary and regularity conditions needed by its proof. Lemma 2 calls the zero sequence “bounded,” although its thresholds tend to infinity; the usable claim is that they stay above a positive lower bound. The formal statements expose these corrections and retain the rest of the source's conclusions.

Formalization scope

Lean represents the first demand stream by a counting process built from independent exponential interarrival times. The terminal revenue after a switch is expressed using the Poisson law of the sum of the two independent counts. The stopping class records the count-generated history, bounds the stopping time by the horizon, and requires stock to remain at stopping almost surely. Its expected payoff uses the number sold before stopping and the immediate-switch value for the unsold stock. Prices and rates are positive, the markdown ordering and revenue-rate inequality are explicit, and the probability measure is named explicitly even though the exponential-interarrival law already entails it.

The paper uses nonnegative real time, inventories indexed by positive integers, and zero salvage. Lean uses a real supremum for the value and a real infimum for each threshold; the admissible payoff is bounded and measurable, and every threshold-defining zero set is asserted nonempty. The ODE is expressed with an actual derivative at positive time. The auxiliary Poisson-tail definition maps a negative mean to zero, but all model applications have nonnegative means. The threshold construction, its ODE, and the equality with the stopping value are all conclusions of the goal, so none is an assumed solution.

For Lemma 1, the formal target adds the initial-time and zero-stock boundary values, domination of terminal revenue, and local Lipschitz regularity in time. The first three conditions are used in the source's own proof or reformulation; local Lipschitz regularity makes its integral calculation valid. Contributions may establish the Poisson-tail calculus, the sign and threshold results, the verification theorem, or the complete markdown theorem. The referenced arrival-process definition is shared infrastructure; the two-price revenue and stopping model are specific to this paper.

Selected references

  • Y. Feng and G. Gallego, Optimal Starting Times for End-of-Season Sales and Optimal Stopping Times for Promotional Fares, Management Science 41(8), 1995, pp. 1371–1391. DOI: 10.1287/mnsc.41.8.1371.
6 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Statistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Poisson Approximation for Dependent Trials 2: For φ-Mixing Bernoulli Trials, an Order-λ⁻¹ Bound on |Eh(W) − 𝒫_λh| in Var W − λ + 2(2m+1)Σp_i² and nφ(m+1)Research Paper

Motivation

The number of successes in many rare trials is approximately Poisson. For independent trials the quality of that approximation was quantified by Le Cam in 1960: if X1,…,XnX_1,\dots,X_nX1​,…,Xn​ are independent Bernoulli variables with P(Xi=1)=piP(X_i=1)=p_iP(Xi​=1)=pi​, W=∑iXiW=\sum_i X_iW=∑i​Xi​ and λ=∑ipi\lambda=\sum_i p_iλ=∑i​pi​, the total variation distance between the law of WWW and the Poisson law with mean λ\lambdaλ is bounded by a constant multiple of ∑ipi2\sum_i p_i^2∑i​pi2​, and by a constant multiple of λ−1∑ipi2\lambda^{-1}\sum_i p_i^2λ−1∑i​pi2​ when λ≥1\lambda\ge 1λ≥1. Many applications have dependent trials: occurrences of a pattern in a sequence, exceedances of a high level by a stationary process, failures in a system with local interactions. L. H. Y. Chen's 1975 paper extended Charles Stein's method of normal approximation to the Poisson case and obtained explicit bounds for dependent trials. The approach became known as the Stein–Chen method, and is now the standard tool for Poisson approximation of dependent counts.

Timeline.

  • 1960. Le Cam proves the independent-trial bounds (0.1)–(0.3) of Chen's introduction.
  • 1964. Kerstan extends them to independent nonnegative integer variables and improves the constant in (0.3).
  • 1970. Stein introduces his method of normal approximation for dependent variables.
  • 1975. Chen (Ann. Probab. 3) adapts it to Poisson approximation. He proves Theorems 4.1–4.4 for sequences satisfying Ibragimov's mixing condition, the mmm-dependent case, and a second-order expansion for independent trials.

This mission formalizes the order-λ−1\lambda^{-1}λ−1 bound of that paper, Theorem 4.2.

Setting

Let (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) be a probability space and let X1,…,XnX_1,\dots,X_nX1​,…,Xn​ be Bernoulli trials: random variables with values in {0,1}\{0,1\}{0,1} and pi=P(Xi=1)p_i=P(X_i=1)pi​=P(Xi​=1). Following the paper, set Xi≡0X_i\equiv0Xi​≡0 for i≤0i\le0i≤0 and i≥n+1i\ge n+1i≥n+1. Put

W=∑i=1nXi,λ=∑i=1npi.W=\sum_{i=1}^nX_i,\qquad \lambda=\sum_{i=1}^np_i .W=i=1∑n​Xi​,λ=i=1∑n​pi​.

For a bounded real function hhh on the nonnegative integers, the Poisson expectation is

Pλh=e−λ∑k=0∞h(k)λkk!,\mathcal P_\lambda h=e^{-\lambda}\sum_{k=0}^\infty h(k)\frac{\lambda^k}{k!},Pλ​h=e−λk=0∑∞​h(k)k!λk​,

the mean of hhh under the Poisson law with parameter λ\lambdaλ. The quantity of interest is ∣Eh(W)−Pλh∣|Eh(W)-\mathcal P_\lambda h|∣Eh(W)−Pλ​h∣ for all hhh with ∣h∣≤1|h|\le1∣h∣≤1. Its supremum over such hhh is twice the total variation distance between the law of WWW and the Poisson law.

Dependence is measured by Ibragimov's mixing condition (4.1). Let Ma,b=σ(Xi:a≤i≤b)\mathcal M_{a,b}=\sigma(X_i:a\le i\le b)Ma,b​=σ(Xi​:a≤i≤b). There must be a non-increasing sequence φ(k)↓0\varphi(k)\downarrow0φ(k)↓0 such that for all j,k≥1j,k\ge1j,k≥1 and every event B∈Mj+k,∞B\in\mathcal M_{j+k,\infty}B∈Mj+k,∞​,

∣P(B∣M1j)−P(B)∣≤φ(k)almost surely.|P(B\mid\mathcal M_{1j})-P(B)|\le\varphi(k)\quad\text{almost surely}.∣P(B∣M1j​)−P(B)∣≤φ(k)almost surely.

A sequence is mmm-dependent when (X1,…,Xr)(X_1,\dots,X_r)(X1​,…,Xr​) and (Xr+k,… )(X_{r+k},\dots)(Xr+k​,…) are independent for all k>mk>mk>m. It then satisfies (4.1) with φ(k)=0\varphi(k)=0φ(k)=0 for k>mk>mk>m.

The proof works with the partial sums V(i)=∑∣k−i∣>mXkV^{(i)}=\sum_{|k-i|>m}X_kV(i)=∑∣k−i∣>m​Xk​, V(i,j)=∑∣k−i∣>m,∣k−j∣>mXkV^{(i,j)}=\sum_{|k-i|>m,|k-j|>m}X_kV(i,j)=∑∣k−i∣>m,∣k−j∣>m​Xk​, Yij=V(i)+∑k=i−mjXkY_{ij}=V^{(i)}+\sum_{k=i-m}^jX_kYij​=V(i)+∑k=i−mj​Xk​ and Yij′=V(i)+∑k=i−m,k≠ijXkY'_{ij}=V^{(i)}+\sum_{k=i-m,k\ne i}^jX_kYij′​=V(i)+∑k=i−m,k=ij​Xk​. It also uses the Stein solution SλhS_\lambda hSλ​h, the solution for w≥1w\ge1w≥1 of wf(w)−λf(w+1)=h(w)−Pλhwf(w)-\lambda f(w+1)=h(w)-\mathcal P_\lambda hwf(w)−λf(w+1)=h(w)−Pλ​h.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.2, (4.13)

For every m=0,1,2,…m=0,1,2,\dotsm=0,1,2,… and every hhh with ∣h∣≤1|h|\le1∣h∣≤1,

∣Eh(W)−Pλh∣≤2λ−1[8m+5+4(nφ(m+1))1/2][Var⁡(W)−λ+2(2m+1)∑i=1npi2]+32[6m+3+(nφ(m+1))1/2]nφ(m+1).|Eh(W)-\mathcal P_\lambda h|\le2\lambda^{-1}\bigl[8m+5+4(n\varphi(m+1))^{1/2}\bigr]\Bigl[\operatorname{Var}(W)-\lambda+2(2m+1)\sum_{i=1}^np_i^2\Bigr]+32\bigl[6m+3+(n\varphi(m+1))^{1/2}\bigr]n\varphi(m+1).∣Eh(W)−Pλ​h∣≤2λ−1[8m+5+4(nφ(m+1))1/2][Var(W)−λ+2(2m+1)i=1∑n​pi2​]+32[6m+3+(nφ(m+1))1/2]nφ(m+1).

The bound involves only the law of WWW through Var⁡(W)\operatorname{Var}(W)Var(W), the success probabilities, the window mmm and the mixing rate. The window mmm is free, so the statement covers every trade-off between local dependence and mixing.

Consequences (companion items)

  • Theorem 4.3, (4.21). For mmm-dependent trials, ∣Eh(W)−Pλh∣≤2(8m+5)λ−1[∑∑i≠jCov⁡(Xi,Xj)+(4m+1)∑pi2]|Eh(W)-\mathcal P_\lambda h|\le2(8m+5)\lambda^{-1}\bigl[\sum\sum_{i\ne j}\operatorname{Cov}(X_i,X_j)+(4m+1)\sum p_i^2\bigr]∣Eh(W)−Pλ​h∣≤2(8m+5)λ−1[∑∑i=j​Cov(Xi​,Xj​)+(4m+1)∑pi2​].
  • Corollary 4.1, (4.23). For independent trials, ∣Eh(W)−Pλh∣≤10λ−1∑pi2|Eh(W)-\mathcal P_\lambda h|\le10\lambda^{-1}\sum p_i^2∣Eh(W)−Pλ​h∣≤10λ−1∑pi2​. This improves Le Cam's (0.3).
  • Theorem 4.4. For identically distributed trials with φ(m)=e−αm\varphi(m)=e^{-\alpha m}φ(m)=e−αm, there are bounds (4.24) and (4.25) whose constants depend only on α\alphaα.

Milestones

The milestones follow the paper's proof:

  • the basic identity (2.2), the Stein solution (2.5) and the expansion (2.6);
  • the bounds on SλhS_\lambda hSλ​h: Lemmas 3.1–3.3, (3.6) and Lemma 3.5;
  • the mixing inequalities, Lemmas 4.1–4.3 and 4.6;
  • the variance bound, Lemma 4.4;
  • the four displays (4.14) and (4.16)–(4.19) of the proof of Theorem 4.2;
  • Cauchy–Schwarz (4.10) and Lemma 4.5.

Significance

Theorem 4.2 gives an error of order λ−1\lambda^{-1}λ−1 times the excess variance Var⁡(W)−λ+O(m∑pi2)\operatorname{Var}(W)-\lambda+O(m\sum p_i^2)Var(W)−λ+O(m∑pi2​), plus a mixing remainder. When the trials are nearly uncorrelated, Var⁡(W)≈λ\operatorname{Var}(W)\approx\lambdaVar(W)≈λ and the bound is small even though λ\lambdaλ is large. This is the regime where the companion Theorem 4.1, which carries a factor min⁡(λ−1/2,1)\min(\lambda^{-1/2},1)min(λ−1/2,1), is weaker. The independent case recovers Le Cam's order λ−1∑pi2\lambda^{-1}\sum p_i^2λ−1∑pi2​ with constant 10. The mmm-dependent case gives explicit Poisson limit theorems for scan statistics and pattern counts.

All results of the paper are proved there, and the proofs are elementary apart from the measure theory of Lemma 4.1. To our knowledge none of them has a machine-checked proof. Mathlib has the Poisson distribution and conditional expectation, but no Stein–Chen bound and no mixing inequality of Ibragimov's type. A formal proof would give the first checked quantitative Poisson approximation for dependent trials. It would also give reusable covariance inequalities for φ\varphiφ-mixing sequences (Lemmas 4.2 and 4.3).

Difficulty

Most of the work is bookkeeping, and it is heavy. Identity (2.2) needs a telescoping over windows [i−m,j][i-m,j][i−m,j] whose ends can fall outside [1,n][1,n][1,n]. (4.15)–(4.18) need ∣Yi,j−1′+1−λ∣|Y'_{i,j-1}+1-\lambda|∣Yi,j−1′​+1−λ∣ to be compared with ∣V(i,j)−EV(i,j)∣|V^{(i,j)}-EV^{(i,j)}|∣V(i,j)−EV(i,j)∣ with explicit constants.

The genuinely probabilistic step is the decoupling of Lemma 4.2. Condition (4.1) controls conditional probabilities of events. Lemma 4.2 needs a bound on conditional expectations of functions of a whole random vector. Passing from one to the other requires a regular conditional distribution that is uniformly close to the unconditional law on a set of full measure (Lemma 4.1). The naive route, applying (4.1) to each level set of a simple function, loses a factor that grows with the number of levels and does not give the constant 2∥f∥2\|f\|2∥f∥.

The bound (4.16) applies Lemma 4.4 to a subsequence of the trials. This uses the fact that dropping variables preserves (4.1) with the same φ\varphiφ, because φ\varphiφ is non-increasing.

Formalization scope

  • Trials. The trials are a map X:N→Ω→NX:\mathbb N\to\Omega\to\mathbb NX:N→Ω→N that is measurable, vanishes at index 000 and above nnn, and is at most 111 almost surely. The constant padding adds nothing to any σ\sigmaσ-algebra, so (4.1), mmm-dependence and independence of the padded sequence are those of X1,…,XnX_1,\dots,X_nX1​,…,Xn​.
  • Probabilities and moments. pip_ipi​ is defined as P(Xi=1)P(X_i=1)P(Xi​=1), not taken as a parameter. Var⁡\operatorname{Var}Var and Cov⁡\operatorname{Cov}Cov are Mathlib's. All integrands are almost surely bounded, so no integrability hypotheses are needed.
  • Norms. Sup norms are replaced by bounds MMM with ∣h∣≤M|h|\le M∣h∣≤M. ∥Sλh∥\|S_\lambda h\|∥Sλ​h∥ ranges over w≥1w\ge1w≥1.
  • Mixing condition. In (4.1) the conditional probability is the conditional expectation of the indicator, and lags are k≥1k\ge1k≥1.
  • Added hypotheses. The §3 lemmas and (2.6), (4.14) assume λ>0\lambda>0λ>0, because they divide by λ\lambdaλ. The goal and the companions do not assume it: at λ=0\lambda=0λ=0 all pip_ipi​ vanish, W=0W=0W=0 almost surely, and both sides are 000 under Lean's convention 0−1=00^{-1}=00−1=0.
  • Lemmas 4.2 and 4.3. They are stated for an arbitrary measurable real sequence satisfying (4.1), as on the page. The independent copy Z′Z'Z′ is expressed through the law of ZZZ.
  • Theorem 4.4. Its constants are quantified before the probability space, nnn and the trials. This is what "depend only on α\alphaα" means.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out. Measurability of the trials is part of the definition, because otherwise conditional expectations in (4.1) collapse to 000. The goal mentions only WWW, λ\lambdaλ, pip_ipi​, Var⁡(W)\operatorname{Var}(W)Var(W), φ\varphiφ, mmm and hhh. It does not mention SλhS_\lambda hSλ​h or any milestone quantity.

A complete development needs the Stein solution and its bounds, a Bernoulli-sum calculus over integer windows, regular conditional distributions on standard Borel spaces, and the mixing covariance inequalities. The last two are reusable beyond this mission. Contributions to any milestone are welcome, as are alternative proofs of Lemma 4.2 through Mathlib's condDistrib.

Selected references

  • L. H. Y. Chen, Poisson approximation for dependent trials, Annals of Probability 3(3):534–545, 1975. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176996359
  • L. Le Cam, An approximation theorem for the Poisson binomial distribution, Pacific Journal of Mathematics 10(4):1181–1197, 1960. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1960.10.1181
  • C. Stein, A bound for the error in the normal approximation to the distribution of a sum of dependent random variables, Proc. Sixth Berkeley Symp. Math. Statist. Probab. 2:583–602, 1972. https://projecteuclid.org/euclid.bsmsp/1200514239
  • I. A. Ibragimov, Some limit theorems for stationary processes, Theory of Probability and its Applications 7(4):349–382, 1962. https://doi.org/10.1137/1107036
  • A. D. Barbour, L. Holst, S. Janson, Poisson Approximation, Oxford University Press, 1992. ISBN 978-0-19-852235-9
22 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Statistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Poisson Approximation for Dependent Trials 3: For Independent Trials with max p_i ≤ λ/2, |Eh(W) − 𝒫_λh + (Σp_i²)𝒫_λU_λh| ≤ (24 + 96√2)λ⁻¹Σp_i³Research Paper

Motivation

The number of successes in many rare, roughly independent trials is approximately Poisson. This law of small numbers is used for counts of rare events in reliability, insurance, epidemiology, queueing and random combinatorics. A quantitative version says how large the error is. For independent Bernoulli trials with success probabilities p1,…,pnp_1,\dots,p_np1​,…,pn​ and λ=∑pi\lambda=\sum p_iλ=∑pi​, Le Cam (1960) showed that the error in total variation is of order ∑pi2\sum p_i^2∑pi2​. When all pip_ipi​ are small this tends to zero, but it does not say what the leading part of the error is.

L. H. Y. Chen's 1975 paper (Ann. Probab. 3, 534–545) adapted Charles Stein's method for normal approximation to the Poisson case. The result is now called the Stein–Chen method. The paper's §2–§4 give first-order error bounds for dependent (mixing) trials. Its §5, "A refinement", goes one order further for independent trials. It identifies the first-order correction explicitly and shows that what remains is of order λ−1∑pi3\lambda^{-1}\sum p_i^3λ−1∑pi3​. Kerstan (1964) had obtained a similar expansion by a different method. Chen's version comes from iterating the basic identity of the Stein–Chen method. This mission formalizes §5.

Timeline:

  • 1953: Prohorov bounds the distance between the binomial and the Poisson law.
  • 1960: Le Cam proves the ∑pi2\sum p_i^2∑pi2​ bound for independent, non-identical trials. Hodges and Le Cam give a short proof.
  • 1964: Kerstan gives a refinement of the Prohorov–Le Cam bounds.
  • 1975: Chen introduces the Stein–Chen method. It gives first-order bounds under Ibragimov's mixing condition and the second-order expansion (Theorem 5.1) for independent trials.

Setting

Let X1,…,XnX_1,\dots,X_nX1​,…,Xn​ be independent random variables on a probability space, each taking only the values 000 and 111, with success probabilities pi=P(Xi=1)p_i=P(X_i=1)pi​=P(Xi​=1). Put

W=∑i=1nXi,λ=∑i=1npi,W(i)=∑k≠iXk,λ(i)=∑j≠ipj.W=\sum_{i=1}^nX_i,\qquad\lambda=\sum_{i=1}^np_i,\qquad W^{(i)}=\sum_{k\ne i}X_k,\qquad\lambda^{(i)}=\sum_{j\ne i}p_j .W=i=1∑n​Xi​,λ=i=1∑n​pi​,W(i)=k=i∑​Xk​,λ(i)=j=i∑​pj​.

For a bounded real function hhh on the nonnegative integers, the Poisson expectation is

Pλh=e−λ∑k=0∞h(k)λkk!,\mathscr P_\lambda h=e^{-\lambda}\sum_{k=0}^\infty h(k)\frac{\lambda^k}{k!},Pλ​h=e−λk=0∑∞​h(k)k!λk​,

the mean of hhh under the Poisson law with parameter λ\lambdaλ. The Stein equation is wf(w)−λf(w+1)=h(w)−Pλhwf(w)-\lambda f(w+1)=h(w)-\mathscr P_\lambda hwf(w)−λf(w+1)=h(w)−Pλ​h. For w≥1w\ge1w≥1 its solution is

Sλh(w)=−(w−1)! λ−w∑k=0w−1[h(k)−Pλh]λkk!.S_\lambda h(w)=-(w-1)!\,\lambda^{-w}\sum_{k=0}^{w-1}\bigl[h(k)-\mathscr P_\lambda h\bigr]\frac{\lambda^k}{k!}.Sλ​h(w)=−(w−1)!λ−wk=0∑w−1​[h(k)−Pλ​h]k!λk​.

Write Δf(w)=f(w+1)−f(w)\Delta f(w)=f(w+1)-f(w)Δf(w)=f(w+1)−f(w) and Lf(w)=f(w+1)Lf(w)=f(w+1)Lf(w)=f(w+1). Chen's second-order operator is

Uλh(w)=ΔSλh(w+1)=Sλh(w+2)−Sλh(w+1),w≥0.U_\lambda h(w)=\Delta S_\lambda h(w+1)=S_\lambda h(w+2)-S_\lambda h(w+1),\qquad w\ge0 .Uλ​h(w)=ΔSλ​h(w+1)=Sλ​h(w+2)−Sλ​h(w+1),w≥0.

For another parameter b>0b>0b>0, SbUλhS_bU_\lambda hSb​Uλ​h and UbUλhU_bU_\lambda hUb​Uλ​h apply the Stein solution and the operator with parameter bbb to the function UλhU_\lambda hUλ​h.

In Lean: poissonExp, stein, delta, shiftL, stU, prob, lam, lamExcept, W, Wi, all in the namespace PoissonDepTrials.SecondOrder.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5.1, (5.7)

If X1,…,XnX_1,\dots,X_nX1​,…,Xn​ are independent, n≥2n\ge2n≥2 and pˉ=max⁡ipi≤λ/2\bar p=\max_ip_i\le\lambda/2pˉ​=maxi​pi​≤λ/2, then for every hhh with ∣h∣≤1|h|\le1∣h∣≤1,

∣Eh(W)−Pλh+(∑i=1npi2)PλUλh∣≤(24+962)λ−1∑i=1npi3.\Bigl|Eh(W)-\mathscr P_\lambda h+\Bigl(\sum_{i=1}^np_i^2\Bigr)\mathscr P_\lambda U_\lambda h\Bigr|\le\bigl(24+96\sqrt2\bigr)\lambda^{-1}\sum_{i=1}^np_i^3 .​Eh(W)−Pλ​h+(i=1∑n​pi2​)Pλ​Uλ​h​≤(24+962​)λ−1i=1∑n​pi3​.

The paper writes the constant as "an absolute constant CCC not greater than 24+96(2)1/224+96(2)^{1/2}24+96(2)1/2". The formal goal fixes CCC at that value, which is the same statement.

Milestones

In order: the Stein solution (2.3)/(2.5); the difference identity (3.6); Lemmas 3.1, 3.2, 3.3 and 3.5 (bounds on SλhS_\lambda hSλ​h and ΔSλh\Delta S_\lambda hΔSλ​h); the first-order identity (5.8) Eh(W)=Pλh−∑ipi2EUλh(W(i))Eh(W)=\mathscr P_\lambda h-\sum_ip_i^2EU_\lambda h(W^{(i)})Eh(W)=Pλ​h−∑i​pi2​EUλ​h(W(i)); Lemmas 5.1 and 5.2 (dependence of Poisson expectations on the parameter); Lemmas 5.3–5.5 (bounds on Pb∣LmUλh∣\mathscr P_b|L^mU_\lambda h|Pb​∣LmUλ​h∣, SbUλhS_bU_\lambda hSb​Uλ​h and UbUλhU_bU_\lambda hUb​Uλ​h); the bound (5.9),

∣Eh(W)−Pλh+(∑pi2)PλUλh∣≤24λ−1∑ipi3+96λ−1∑i∑j≠ipi2pj2λ(i);\Bigl|Eh(W)-\mathscr P_\lambda h+\Bigl(\sum p_i^2\Bigr)\mathscr P_\lambda U_\lambda h\Bigr|\le24\lambda^{-1}\sum_ip_i^3+96\lambda^{-1}\sum_i\sum_{j\ne i}\frac{p_i^2p_j^2}{\lambda^{(i)}};​Eh(W)−Pλ​h+(∑pi2​)Pλ​Uλ​h​≤24λ−1i∑​pi3​+96λ−1i∑​j=i∑​λ(i)pi2​pj2​​;

and the closing inequality λ−1∑ipi2∑j≠ipj2/λ(i)≤2 λ−1∑ipi3\lambda^{-1}\sum_ip_i^2\sum_{j\ne i}p_j^2/\lambda^{(i)}\le\sqrt2\,\lambda^{-1}\sum_ip_i^3λ−1∑i​pi2​∑j=i​pj2​/λ(i)≤2​λ−1∑i​pi3​.

Significance

The theorem gives an explicit first correction to the Poisson approximation of a Poisson-binomial law, with a remainder of the next order. When all pip_ipi​ equal ppp, the first-order error ∑pi2=λp\sum p_i^2=\lambda p∑pi2​=λp is replaced by the remainder λ−1∑pi3=p2\lambda^{-1}\sum p_i^3=p^2λ−1∑pi3​=p2, which is smaller by the factor λ\lambdaλ. The correction term is a functional of the Poisson law alone, −(∑pi2)PλUλh-(\sum p_i^2)\mathscr P_\lambda U_\lambda h−(∑pi2​)Pλ​Uλ​h. It can be evaluated without knowing the distribution of WWW. The method of proof applies the basic identity twice. The paper notes that further iteration gives expansions to any order.

On the formal side, Mathlib has the Poisson distribution but no Stein–Chen machinery and no quantitative Poisson approximation. The theorem has, as far as is known, no machine-checked proof. This mission produces the Stein solution and its standard bounds (Lemmas 3.1–3.5), which are reusable by any Stein–Chen argument. It also produces the parameter-perturbation estimates of Lemmas 5.1–5.2 and a complete second-order expansion. Missions 1 and 2 of this series formalize the first-order bounds of §4 under a mixing condition. They share the Stein-solution layer.

Difficulty

The first-order bound needs only that ΔSλh\Delta S_\lambda hΔSλ​h is uniformly small (Lemma 3.4). A second-order bound needs more. After the first application of the identity, the error ∑pi2EUλh(W(i))\sum p_i^2EU_\lambda h(W^{(i)})∑pi2​EUλ​h(W(i)) has to be expanded again. That requires control of the iterated operator UbUλhU_bU_\lambda hUb​Uλ​h with a different parameter b=λ(i)b=\lambda^{(i)}b=λ(i), because W(i)W^{(i)}W(i) is approximately Poisson with mean λ(i)\lambda^{(i)}λ(i), not λ\lambdaλ. The bound on UbUλhU_bU_\lambda hUb​Uλ​h (Lemma 5.5) grows linearly in ∣w−λ∣|w-\lambda|∣w−λ∣. Applying the uniform bounds of §3 throughout loses a factor λ1/2\lambda^{1/2}λ1/2 and produces an error of order λ−1/2∑pi3\lambda^{-1/2}\sum p_i^3λ−1/2∑pi3​ instead of λ−1∑pi3\lambda^{-1}\sum p_i^3λ−1∑pi3​. The linear growth has to be paired with the variance of W(i,j)W^{(i,j)}W(i,j). The averaging over pairs (i,j)(i,j)(i,j) in the final step uses the condition pˉ≤λ/2\bar p\le\lambda/2pˉ​≤λ/2, which keeps every λ(i)\lambda^{(i)}λ(i) comparable to λ\lambdaλ.

Formalization scope

Conventions committed to in Lean:

  • The trials are a sequence X : ℕ → Ω → ℕ. Each XiX_iXi​ is measurable with values in {0,1}\{0,1\}{0,1} almost surely. Xi≡0X_i\equiv0Xi​≡0 for i=0i=0i=0 and i>ni>ni>n, which is the paper's own padding convention (p. 535). Independence is iIndepFun (fun i => X i) P over all of ℕ. Because the padding variables are constants, this is equivalent to independence of X1,…,XnX_1,\dots,X_nX1​,…,Xn​.
  • pip_ipi​ is defined from XXX, not taken as a parameter.
  • ∥h∥\|h\|∥h∥ is replaced by an arbitrary bound MMM with ∣h(k)∣≤M|h(k)|\le M∣h(k)∣≤M for all kkk. The norm of SλhS_\lambda hSλ​h is taken over its domain w≥1w\ge1w≥1.
  • pˉ≤λ/2\bar p\le\lambda/2pˉ​≤λ/2 is written as pi≤λ/2p_i\le\lambda/2pi​≤λ/2 for every i∈{1,…,n}i\in\{1,\dots,n\}i∈{1,…,n}.
  • The goal assumes neither λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 nor integrability. Every function involved is bounded, so every expectation and Poisson sum is genuine. At λ=0\lambda=0λ=0 both sides of (5.7) vanish.

Hypotheses added relative to the page, each disclosed in the item's Formalization Note:

  • λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 in the §3 and §5 lemmas, in (5.8) and in (5.9). These divide by λ\lambdaλ, by bbb or by λ(i)\lambda^{(i)}λ(i).
  • b>0b>0b>0 in Lemmas 5.3–5.5, which is the standing range of §5.
  • Boundedness of fff in Lemma 5.2. The lemma is only applied to bounded functions.

The random indices I,JI,JI,J that the paper introduces to shorten notation in (5.8)–(5.9) are not formalized. The same quantities are written as finite sums over indices.

Ruled out: the second-order term must be the operator Uλh=ΔSλh(⋅+1)U_\lambda h=\Delta S_\lambda h(\cdot+1)Uλ​h=ΔSλ​h(⋅+1) built from the Stein solution exactly as on p. 543. A free function, or UλhU_\lambda hUλ​h evaluated at the junk value Sλh(0)S_\lambda h(0)Sλ​h(0), would empty the theorem.

Welcome contributions include:

  • the Stein-solution bounds of §3, which are reusable well beyond this paper;
  • Poisson-sum manipulations (Lemmas 5.1–5.2);
  • the independence bookkeeping that turns (2.6) into (5.8).

Selected references

  • L. H. Y. Chen, Poisson approximation for dependent trials, Ann. Probab. 3(3):534–545, 1975. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176996359
  • L. Le Cam, An approximation theorem for the Poisson binomial distribution, Pacific J. Math. 10:1181–1197, 1960. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1960.10.1181
  • J. L. Hodges and L. Le Cam, The Poisson approximation to the Poisson binomial distribution, Ann. Math. Statist. 31:737–740, 1960. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177705799
  • J. Kerstan, Verallgemeinerung eines Satzes von Prochorow und Le Cam, Z. Wahrscheinlichkeitstheorie verw. Gebiete 2:173–179, 1964. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00533419
  • C. Stein, A bound for the error in the normal approximation to the distribution of a sum of dependent random variables, Proc. Sixth Berkeley Symp. Math. Statist. Prob. 2, 1972. https://projecteuclid.org/euclid.bsmsp/1200514239
16 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Statistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Poisson Approximation for Dependent Trials 1: For φ-Mixing Bernoulli Trials, |Eh(W) − 𝒫_λh| ≤ 6 min(λ^{−1/2}, 1)[Var W − λ + 2(2m+1)Σp_i² + 4(λ+1)nφ(m+1)]Research Paper

Motivation

A sum of many rare events is approximately Poisson. For independent Bernoulli trials this is the classical law of small numbers, and its quantitative form goes back to Prohorov (1953) and Le Cam (1960): if X1,…,XnX_1,\dots,X_nX1​,…,Xn​ are independent with P(Xi=1)=piP(X_i=1)=p_iP(Xi​=1)=pi​, then the law of W=∑iXiW=\sum_i X_iW=∑i​Xi​ is close to the Poisson law with mean λ=∑ipi\lambda=\sum_i p_iλ=∑i​pi​, with an error controlled by ∑ipi2\sum_i p_i^2∑i​pi2​. Many applications need the same conclusion for dependent trials: runs and clusters in sequences, exceedances of a stationary time series, matches in DNA sequences, extremes of mixing processes.

Louis H. Y. Chen's 1975 paper adapted Charles Stein's method for normal approximation (1970, published 1972) to the Poisson case and obtained explicit error bounds for sums of dependent Bernoulli trials under mixing and mmm-dependence. The technique, now called the Stein–Chen method, became the standard tool for Poisson approximation, through Arratia, Goldstein and Gordon (1989) and Barbour, Holst and Janson, Poisson Approximation (1992).

Timeline:

  • 1953–1960. Prohorov and Le Cam bound the error of the Poisson approximation for independent trials.
  • 1964. Kerstan extends Le Cam's bounds to independent nonnegative integer-valued variables.
  • 1970. Stein introduces his method for normal approximation of dependent sums (Berkeley Symposium, proceedings 1972).
  • 1975. Chen proves Poisson approximation bounds for φ\varphiφ-mixing and mmm-dependent trials (this mission).
  • 1989–1992. Arratia–Goldstein–Gordon and Barbour–Holst–Janson give local-dependence and total-variation versions.

Setting

Let (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) be a probability space and X1,…,XnX_1,\dots,X_nX1​,…,Xn​ Bernoulli random variables, possibly dependent, with success probabilities pi=P(Xi=1)p_i=P(X_i=1)pi​=P(Xi​=1). Put

W=∑i=1nXi,λ=∑i=1npi.W=\sum_{i=1}^n X_i,\qquad \lambda=\sum_{i=1}^n p_i .W=i=1∑n​Xi​,λ=i=1∑n​pi​.

For a real function hhh on the nonnegative integers, the Poisson expectation of hhh is

Pλh=e−λ∑k=0∞h(k)λkk!,\mathcal P_\lambda h=e^{-\lambda}\sum_{k=0}^\infty h(k)\frac{\lambda^k}{k!},Pλ​h=e−λk=0∑∞​h(k)k!λk​,

the mean of hhh under the Poisson distribution with parameter λ\lambdaλ. The quantity to be bounded is ∣Eh(W)−Pλh∣|Eh(W)-\mathcal P_\lambda h|∣Eh(W)−Pλ​h∣ for all hhh with ∣h∣≤1|h|\le1∣h∣≤1; its supremum over such hhh is twice the total variation distance between the law of WWW and the Poisson law.

Dependence is measured by Ibragimov's mixing condition. Write Ma,b\mathcal M_{a,b}Ma,b​ for the σ\sigmaσ-algebra generated by Xa,…,XbX_a,\dots,X_bXa​,…,Xb​ and Ma,∞\mathcal M_{a,\infty}Ma,∞​ for that generated by Xa,Xa+1,…X_a,X_{a+1},\dotsXa​,Xa+1​,…. The sequence satisfies (4.1) with a nonincreasing sequence φ(k)↓0\varphi(k)\downarrow0φ(k)↓0 if, for all j,k≥1j,k\ge1j,k≥1 and every event B∈Mj+k,∞B\in\mathcal M_{j+k,\infty}B∈Mj+k,∞​,

∣P(B∣M1j)−P(B)∣≤φ(k)almost surely.\bigl|P(B\mid\mathcal M_{1j})-P(B)\bigr|\le\varphi(k)\quad\text{almost surely}.​P(B∣M1j​)−P(B)​≤φ(k)almost surely.

Thus φ(k)\varphi(k)φ(k) bounds how much knowledge of the first jjj trials can change the probability of an event determined by trials at distance at least kkk. A sequence is mmm-dependent if (X1,…,Xr)(X_1,\dots,X_r)(X1​,…,Xr​) and (Xr+k,Xr+k+1,… )(X_{r+k},X_{r+k+1},\dots)(Xr+k​,Xr+k+1​,…) are independent whenever k>mk>mk>m; then (4.1) holds with φ(k)=0\varphi(k)=0φ(k)=0 for k>mk>mk>m, and independent trials are the case m=0m=0m=0.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.1 (p. 541)

For every m=0,1,2,…m=0,1,2,\dotsm=0,1,2,… and every hhh with ∣h∣≤1|h|\le1∣h∣≤1,

∣Eh(W)−Pλh∣≤6min⁡(λ−1/2,1)[Var⁡(W)−λ+2(2m+1)∑i=1npi2+4(λ+1) n φ(m+1)].\bigl|Eh(W)-\mathcal P_\lambda h\bigr|\le6\min(\lambda^{-1/2},1)\Bigl[\operatorname{Var}(W)-\lambda+2(2m+1)\sum_{i=1}^np_i^2+4(\lambda+1)\,n\,\varphi(m+1)\Bigr].​Eh(W)−Pλ​h​≤6min(λ−1/2,1)[Var(W)−λ+2(2m+1)i=1∑n​pi2​+4(λ+1)nφ(m+1)].

The parameter mmm is free: it trades the local term 2(2m+1)∑pi22(2m+1)\sum p_i^22(2m+1)∑pi2​ against the mixing term nφ(m+1)n\varphi(m+1)nφ(m+1).

Consequences

  • Theorem 4.3, (4.20). For mmm-dependent trials the mixing term vanishes:
∣Eh(W)−Pλh∣≤6min⁡(λ−1/2,1)[∑∑i≠jCov⁡(Xi,Xj)+(4m+1)∑i=1npi2].\bigl|Eh(W)-\mathcal P_\lambda h\bigr|\le6\min(\lambda^{-1/2},1)\Bigl[\sum\sum_{i\ne j}\operatorname{Cov}(X_i,X_j)+(4m+1)\sum_{i=1}^np_i^2\Bigr].​Eh(W)−Pλ​h​≤6min(λ−1/2,1)[∑i=j∑​Cov(Xi​,Xj​)+(4m+1)i=1∑n​pi2​].
  • Corollary 4.1 (Le Cam), (4.22). For independent trials, ∣Eh(W)−Pλh∣≤6min⁡(λ−1/2,1)∑ipi2|Eh(W)-\mathcal P_\lambda h|\le6\min(\lambda^{-1/2},1)\sum_ip_i^2∣Eh(W)−Pλ​h∣≤6min(λ−1/2,1)∑i​pi2​.

Milestones

The milestones follow the paper's proof:

  1. the basic identity (2.2) for E[Wf(W)−λf(W+1)]E[Wf(W)-\lambda f(W+1)]E[Wf(W)−λf(W+1)], valid for any dependence;
  2. the solution SλhS_\lambda hSλ​h of the Stein equation (2.3)–(2.5), and the resulting representation (2.6) of Eh(W)−PλhEh(W)-\mathcal P_\lambda hEh(W)−Pλ​h;
  3. the bounds on SλhS_\lambda hSλ​h and ΔSλh\Delta S_\lambda hΔSλ​h (Lemmas 3.1–3.4);
  4. the covariance inequalities under mixing (Lemmas 4.1–4.3, 4.6);
  5. the variance identity (4.7), the bound (4.8), the inequality (4.10) and Lemma 4.5.

Significance

The theorem bounds the distance to the Poisson law by quantities a user can compute or estimate: the variance of WWW, the pip_ipi​, and the mixing rate. When the trials are weakly dependent and individually rare, Var⁡(W)≈λ\operatorname{Var}(W)\approx\lambdaVar(W)≈λ, ∑pi2\sum p_i^2∑pi2​ is small, and the bound is small. It recovers Le Cam's independent-case bound up to the constant and extends it to mmm-dependent and φ\varphiφ-mixing sequences. The expansion (2.6) and the bounds on the Stein solution in §3 are reused throughout the later literature on the Stein–Chen method.

The results of this paper are proved on paper; none of them is formalized in a proof assistant. Mathlib has the Poisson distribution, conditional expectation, independence and regular conditional distributions, but no Stein–Chen identity, no bounds on the Stein solution, and no covariance inequality for φ\varphiφ-mixing sequences. This mission produces all three, and the companion missions of this series (Theorem 4.2, an order-λ−1\lambda^{-1}λ−1 bound, and Theorem 5.1, a second-order refinement for independent trials) rely on the same objects.

Difficulty

The identities (2.2), (2.6) and (4.7) are finite manipulations, and the bounds of §3 on SλhS_\lambda hSλ​h are elementary real analysis. The main difficulty is the transfer of the mixing condition from events to functions. Condition (4.1) bounds conditional probabilities of single events almost surely, with a null set that depends on the event. Lemma 4.2 needs a bound on EYf(Y,Z)−EYf(Y,Z′)E^Yf(Y,Z)-E^Yf(Y,Z')EYf(Y,Z)−EYf(Y,Z′) for an arbitrary bounded function of a past vector YYY and a future vector ZZZ; this requires a regular conditional distribution of ZZZ given YYY and one null set that works for all events at once (Lemma 4.1). That step uses that Rs\mathbb R^sRs is a standard Borel space, and it fails for an argument that handles one event at a time. Lemma 4.3 then needs care with the independent copy Z′Z'Z′ and with the three-block decomposition.

Formalization scope

All objects are defined in PoissonDepTrials.MixSqrt.Setting. The conventions are:

  • The trials are a sequence X:N→Ω→NX:\mathbb N\to\Omega\to\mathbb NX:N→Ω→N, measurable, with values in {0,1}\{0,1\}{0,1} almost surely, and identically zero at index 000 and at indices above nnn. The zero padding is the paper's own convention (p. 535), and it changes no σ\sigmaσ-algebra.
  • pip_ipi​ is defined as P(Xi=1)P(X_i=1)P(Xi​=1), not taken as a parameter.
  • ∥h∥\|h\|∥h∥ is replaced by an arbitrary bound MMM with ∣h∣≤M|h|\le M∣h∣≤M. ∥Sλh∥\|S_\lambda h\|∥Sλ​h∥ is taken over w≥1w\ge1w≥1, the domain of SλhS_\lambda hSλ​h.
  • P(B∣M1j)P(B\mid\mathcal M_{1j})P(B∣M1j​) is the conditional expectation of the indicator of BBB. Measurability of every XiX_iXi​ is assumed wherever (4.1) is used.
  • mmm-dependence is stated for the tail σ\sigmaσ-algebra Mr+k,∞\mathcal M_{r+k,\infty}Mr+k,∞​, which is equivalent to the paper's finite blocks.
  • EYf(Y,Z′)E^Yf(Y,Z')EYf(Y,Z′), for Z′Z'Z′ an independent copy of ZZZ, is written as ∫f(Y,z) dPZ(z)\int f(Y,z)\,dP_Z(z)∫f(Y,z)dPZ​(z), without enlarging Ω\OmegaΩ.
  • In Lemma 4.1, "Borel space" is StandardBorelSpace.

Added hypotheses: λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 in the identity (2.6) and in Lemmas 3.3, 3.4 and (2.5), because SλhS_\lambda hSλ​h divides by λw\lambda^wλw; m≥1m\ge1m≥1 and a≥1a\ge1a≥1 in Lemmas 4.2 and 4.3, because (4.1) concerns lags ≥1\ge1≥1 of a sequence starting at X1X_1X1​. The goal has no hypothesis λ>0\lambda>0λ>0: at λ=0\lambda=0λ=0 every trial vanishes almost surely and both sides are zero.

The goal does not mention SλhS_\lambda hSλ​h, V(i)V^{(i)}V(i) or YijY_{ij}Yij​; it is stated only in terms of WWW, λ\lambdaλ, the pip_ipi​, Var⁡(W)\operatorname{Var}(W)Var(W), φ\varphiφ, mmm and hhh. The mixing condition is required to hold with a nonincreasing φ\varphiφ tending to 000, so it cannot be satisfied vacuously.

Reusable infrastructure includes the Stein–Chen identity (2.2), the bounds on the Stein solution (Lemmas 3.3, 3.4), and the covariance inequalities for φ\varphiφ-mixing sequences (Lemmas 4.2, 4.3), which apply beyond Poisson approximation. Proofs of any milestone are welcome, as are proofs of the companion results from the goal.

Selected references

  • L. H. Y. Chen, Poisson approximation for dependent trials, Ann. Probab. 3(3):534–545, 1975. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176996359
  • C. Stein, A bound for the error in the normal approximation to the distribution of a sum of dependent random variables, Proc. Sixth Berkeley Symp. Math. Statist. Probab. 2:583–602, 1972. https://projecteuclid.org/euclid.bsmsp/1200514239
  • L. Le Cam, An approximation theorem for the Poisson binomial distribution, Pacific J. Math. 10(4):1181–1197, 1960. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1960.10.1181
  • I. A. Ibragimov, Some limit theorems for stationary processes, Theory Probab. Appl. 7(4):349–382, 1962. https://doi.org/10.1137/1107036
  • R. Arratia, L. Goldstein, L. Gordon, Two moments suffice for Poisson approximations: the Chen–Stein method, Ann. Probab. 17(1):9–25, 1989. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176991491
  • A. D. Barbour, L. Holst, S. Janson, Poisson Approximation, Oxford University Press, 1992. https://global.oup.com/academic/product/poisson-approximation-9780198522355
17 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Supply Chain Coordination with Contracts VI: With a Forecast Update, Buy-Back Terms with w₁ − w₂ + λc₂ = λc₁ Give the Retailer λΩ₁(q₁) and a Lower Period-2 Margin w₂ − c₂ < w₁ − c₁Textbook

Motivation

A newsvendor retailer who may order twice faces a tradeoff. Ordering late lets the retailer use a better demand forecast. Ordering early lets the supplier produce more cheaply, with longer procurement lead times and no overtime labor. Fisher and Raman (1996) document such forecast improvements between ordering epochs in fashion apparel. A decentralized supply chain must balance cheap early production against well-informed late production, and it is not obvious that a simple contract can induce both firms to strike the balance an integrated firm would choose.

This mission formalizes §6.6 of G. P. Cachon's survey chapter Supply Chain Coordination with Contracts (Handbooks in OR & MS, Vol. 11, 2003), read in the author's January 2003 draft. The section builds on Donohue (2000), who studied the same two-mode production problem under forced compliance. The chapter's model lets the supplier operate under voluntary compliance: she may deliver less than the retailer orders, and she may produce more in period 1 than was ordered. The question is whether a buy back contract with one wholesale price per ordering epoch still coordinates the supply chain.

Setting

A demand signal ξ≥0\xi \ge 0ξ≥0 with density ggg and distribution function GGG is observed once before the selling season. Given ξ\xiξ, demand DDD has distribution function F(⋅ ∣ ξ)F(\cdot\,|\,\xi)F(⋅∣ξ), continuous and strictly increasing on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞). Demand is stochastically increasing in the signal: F(x ∣ ξh)<F(x ∣ ξl)F(x\,|\,\xi_h) < F(x\,|\,\xi_l)F(x∣ξh​)<F(x∣ξl​) for ξh>ξl\xi_h > \xi_lξh​>ξl​. Expected sales are S(q ∣ ξ)=E[min⁡(q,D) ∣ ξ]S(q\,|\,\xi) = E[\min(q,D)\,|\,\xi]S(q∣ξ)=E[min(q,D)∣ξ]. Period 1 is before the signal and period 2 is after it. The retailer's total order is q1q_1q1​ after period 1 and q2≥q1q_2 \ge q_1q2​≥q1​ after period 2. The supplier's unit production cost is cic_ici​ in period iii, with c1<c2<pc_1 < c_2 < pc1​<c2​<p, where ppp is the retail price. Salvage values and goodwill costs are zero.

The supply chain's period-2 objective is

Ω2(q2 ∣ q1,ξ)=pS(q2 ∣ ξ)−c2q2+c2q1,\Omega_2(q_2\,|\,q_1,\xi) = pS(q_2\,|\,\xi) - c_2 q_2 + c_2 q_1 ,Ω2​(q2​∣q1​,ξ)=pS(q2​∣ξ)−c2​q2​+c2​q1​,

and q2(q1,ξ)q_2(q_1,\xi)q2​(q1​,ξ) maximizes it over q2≥q1q_2 \ge q_1q2​≥q1​. The supply chain's expected profit is Ω1(q1)=−c1q1+E[Ω2(q2(q1,ξ) ∣ q1,ξ)]\Omega_1(q_1) = -c_1 q_1 + E[\Omega_2(q_2(q_1,\xi)\,|\,q_1,\xi)]Ω1​(q1​)=−c1​q1​+E[Ω2​(q2​(q1​,ξ)∣q1​,ξ)].

Under the buy back contract {w1,w2,b}\{w_1, w_2, b\}{w1​,w2​,b} the retailer pays wiw_iwi​ per unit ordered in period iii, and the supplier refunds bbb per unsold unit. The retailer's period-2 profit is π2(q2 ∣ q1,ξ)=(p−b)S(q2 ∣ ξ)−(w2−b)q2+w2q1\pi_2(q_2\,|\,q_1,\xi) = (p-b)S(q_2\,|\,\xi) - (w_2-b)q_2 + w_2 q_1π2​(q2​∣q1​,ξ)=(p−b)S(q2​∣ξ)−(w2​−b)q2​+w2​q1​, and his period-1 profit is π1(q1)=−w1q1+E[π2(q2(q1,ξ) ∣ q1,ξ)]\pi_1(q_1) = -w_1 q_1 + E[\pi_2(q_2(q_1,\xi)\,|\,q_1,\xi)]π1​(q1​)=−w1​q1​+E[π2​(q2​(q1​,ξ)∣q1​,ξ)]. The supplier's period-2 profit Π2\Pi_2Π2​ and her period-1 profit Π1(x ∣ q1)\Pi_1(x\,|\,q_1)Π1​(x∣q1​), as functions of the stock xxx she holds, are given in the mission's Profits definition.

Formalization targets

Goal: the buy back contract coordinates

For λ∈[0,1]\lambda \in [0,1]λ∈[0,1] with

p−b=λp,w2−b=λc2,w1−w2+λc2=λc1,p - b = \lambda p,\qquad w_2 - b = \lambda c_2,\qquad w_1 - w_2 + \lambda c_2 = \lambda c_1,p−b=λp,w2​−b=λc2​,w1​−w2​+λc2​=λc1​,

the identities

π2(q2 ∣ q1,ξ)=λ(Ω2(q2 ∣ q1,ξ)−c2q1)+w2q1,π1(q1)=λ Ω1(q1)\pi_2(q_2\,|\,q_1,\xi) = \lambda\big(\Omega_2(q_2\,|\,q_1,\xi) - c_2 q_1\big) + w_2 q_1,\qquad \pi_1(q_1) = \lambda\,\Omega_1(q_1)π2​(q2​∣q1​,ξ)=λ(Ω2​(q2​∣q1​,ξ)−c2​q1​)+w2​q1​,π1​(q1​)=λΩ1​(q1​)

hold, so the supply chain's optima in both periods are the retailer's optima (with equivalence for λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0). In addition,

w2−c2=w1−(λc1+(1−λ)c2)<w1−c1(λ<1).w_2 - c_2 = w_1 - \big(\lambda c_1 + (1-\lambda)c_2\big) < w_1 - c_1 \quad (\lambda < 1).w2​−c2​=w1​−(λc1​+(1−λ)c2​)<w1​−c1​(λ<1).

Milestones

  1. The structure of the period-2 problem, Eqs. (25)–(26): q2(ξ)q_2(\xi)q2​(ξ) solves F(q2(ξ) ∣ ξ)=(p−c2)/pF(q_2(\xi)\,|\,\xi) = (p-c_2)/pF(q2​(ξ)∣ξ)=(p−c2​)/p and increases in ξ\xiξ, and the threshold ξ(q1)\xi(q_1)ξ(q1​) splits the signals into those that trigger a period-2 order and those that do not.
  2. The retailer's period-2 identity (p. 65).
  3. The supplier fills any period-2 order up to q2(q1,ξ)q_2(q_1,\xi)q2​(q1​,ξ), and for λ<1\lambda < 1λ<1 she does not fill a larger one (p. 65).
  4. The retailer's period-1 identity (p. 66).
  5. The first-order condition (27) for q1oq_1^oq1o​.
  6. The supplier's period-2 profit increases in her stock below q1q_1q1​, so she produces at least the period-1 order (p. 66).
  7. The supplier produces exactly the period-1 order (p. 67).
  8. The margin comparison (p. 67).

Significance

The result shows that the buy back contract, which coordinates the single-period newsvendor, extends to a setting with a forecast update and two production modes, even when the supplier is free to under-deliver or to stockpile. Profit can be divided arbitrarily through λ\lambdaλ. Coordination also forces the supplier's margin on expensive late production below her margin on cheap early production, which contradicts the intuition that the better-informed late order should command a premium. Milestone 7 rules out stranded inventory: under the coordinating terms the supplier never stocks more than the retailer ordered in period 1.

These results are established on paper in Cachon's chapter. No machine-checked version is known. The identities are algebraic. The supplier's production result needs differentiation of an expectation over the signal across the moving threshold ξ(x)\xi(x)ξ(x).

Difficulty

The retailer's identities reduce to algebra once the contract terms are substituted, and the margin comparison is one line. The substantive steps are the derivative formulas (27) and ∂Π1(x ∣ q1)/∂x=−c1+c2(1−G(ξ(x)))\partial \Pi_1(x\,|\,q_1)/\partial x = -c_1 + c_2(1 - G(\xi(x)))∂Π1​(x∣q1​)/∂x=−c1​+c2​(1−G(ξ(x))). The obvious move, differentiating inside the expectation term by term, fails because the period-2 optimum max⁡(q1,q2(ξ))\max(q_1, q_2(\xi))max(q1​,q2​(ξ)) has a kink at ξ=ξ(q1)\xi = \xi(q_1)ξ=ξ(q1​). The integrand switches between two regimes, and the switch point moves with q1q_1q1​. The supplier's period-1 profit is not differentiable at x=q1x = q_1x=q1​; only its right derivative is negative at q1oq_1^oq1o​. Turning the page's derivative statements into the global claim that x=q1ox = q_1^ox=q1o​ is her unique optimum needs a monotonicity argument on both sides of q1oq_1^oq1o​.

Formalization scope

The conditional law is a measurable family ξ↦Dξ\xi \mapsto D_\xiξ↦Dξ​ of probability measures on R\mathbb RR supported on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), each with a finite mean, a continuous distribution function, and a distribution function strictly increasing on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞). The signal has a measurable density g≥0g \ge 0g≥0 with ∫0∞g=1\int_0^\infty g = 1∫0∞​g=1, and demand has a finite unconditional mean. These standing assumptions follow the chapter's p. 7 newsvendor model, together with the measurability needed for expectations over the signal. 0<c2<p0 < c_2 < p0<c2​<p makes the critical ratio lie in (0,1)(0,1)(0,1). Expected sales reuse the platform definition SupplyChainTheory.expSales (from SupplyChainTheory_contracts).

The optimum q2(q1,ξ)q_2(q_1,\xi)q2​(q1​,ξ) is a hypothesis-carried selection maximizing Ω2\Omega_2Ω2​ over q2≥q1q_2 \ge q_1q2​≥q1​. It is never an arbitrary function: a formalization that let q2(q1,ξ)q_2(q_1,\xi)q2​(q1​,ξ) be unconstrained would make π1=λΩ1\pi_1 = \lambda\Omega_1π1​=λΩ1​ a statement about meaningless orders. The thresholds ξ(q1)\xi(q_1)ξ(q1​) enter as solutions of (26) whose existence is assumed where the page assumes it. Optimal order quantities are taken over q1≥0q_1 \ge 0q1​≥0 and q2≥q1q_2 \ge q_1q2​≥q1​. Derivatives are stated with HasDerivAt (or HasDerivWithinAt for the right derivative at a kink).

Three corrections of the print are disclosed in the item notes:

  • the strict margin inequality fails at λ=1\lambda = 1λ=1;
  • the p. 66 identity for Π2(x,q1,q2,ξ)\Pi_2(x, q_1, q_2, \xi)Π2​(x,q1​,q2​,ξ) is off by the constant (1−λ)c2q1(1-\lambda)c_2q_1(1−λ)c2​q1​;
  • "retailer optimal equals chain optimal" needs λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0 in the converse direction.

Contributions are welcome on all milestones. A lemma that differentiates q↦E[max⁡q2≥qΩ2]q \mapsto E[\max_{q_2 \ge q} \Omega_2]q↦E[maxq2​≥q​Ω2​] with a density-driven threshold would be reusable beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • G. P. Cachon, Supply Chain Coordination with Contracts, in S. Graves and T. de Kok (eds.), Handbooks in Operations Research and Management Science, Vol. 11: Supply Chain Management, North-Holland, 2003, Ch. 6. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0927-0507(03)11006-7
  • K. L. Donohue, Efficient Supply Contracts for Fashion Goods with Forecast Updating and Two Production Modes, Management Science 46(11), 1397–1411, 2000. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.46.11.1397.12088
  • M. Fisher and A. Raman, Reducing the Cost of Demand Uncertainty Through Accurate Response to Early Sales, Operations Research 44(1), 87–99, 1996. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.44.1.87
12 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Supply Chain Coordination with Contracts VII: In the Single-Location Base-Stock Model the Transfers t_I = (1 − λ)h_r, t_B = β_r − λβ Make the Retailer's Cost λc(s_r)Textbook

Motivation

A retailer can keep too little inventory even when its own stocking decision is optimal. In the single-location model of Cachon, Supply Chain Coordination with Contracts (2003), the supplier suffers a cost when the retailer has backorders, but the retailer does not bear that part of the cost. The supplier and retailer therefore prefer different base-stock levels. Section 6.7 asks whether payments tied to expected inventory and backorders can make the retailer choose the level that minimizes their combined cost. The result also describes how the contract divides that cost between the firms.

The model concerns a continuing operation with repeated replenishment opportunities and backordered demand. A base-stock policy keeps the retailer's inventory position at a chosen level by replacing units as demand occurs. Cachon reduces the cost calculation for such a policy to the distribution of demand over one replenishment lead time. That reduction allows the coordination question to be stated with one real stock-level decision rather than a full inventory trajectory. The chapter presents this model as a building block for its two-location system in §6.8 Cachon (2003).

Setting

Let DrD_rDr​ denote lead-time demand, the amount demanded while the retailer waits for replenishment. It is nonnegative and has a finite mean μr=E[Dr]\mu_r=\mathbb E[D_r]μr​=E[Dr​], distribution function FrF_rFr​, and density frf_rfr​. At inventory level s∈Rs\in\mathbb Rs∈R, expected inventory is Ir(s)=E[(s−Dr)+]I_r(s)=\mathbb E[(s-D_r)^+]Ir​(s)=E[(s−Dr​)+] and expected backorders are Br(s)=E[(Dr−s)+]B_r(s)=\mathbb E[(D_r-s)^+]Br​(s)=E[(Dr​−s)+], where x+=max⁡(x,0)x^+=\max(x,0)x+=max(x,0). The section assumes Fr(0)=0F_r(0)=0Fr​(0)=0 and a strictly increasing differentiable FrF_rFr​ on nonnegative levels. These assumptions place the optimum above zero.

The retailer pays holding cost hrIr(s)h_r I_r(s)hr​Ir​(s) and its own backorder cost βrBr(s)\beta_r B_r(s)βr​Br​(s). The supplier pays a further backorder cost βsBr(s)\beta_s B_r(s)βs​Br​(s). All three cost rates are positive. Thus cr(s)=hrIr(s)+βrBr(s)c_r(s)=h_r I_r(s)+\beta_r B_r(s)cr​(s)=hr​Ir​(s)+βr​Br​(s) and cs(s)=βsBr(s)c_s(s)=\beta_s B_r(s)cs​(s)=βs​Br​(s) are the firms' costs, while c(s)=cr(s)+cs(s)c(s)=c_r(s)+c_s(s)c(s)=cr​(s)+cs​(s) is the channel cost. Write β=βr+βs\beta=\beta_r+\beta_sβ=βr​+βs​. Because demand is backordered rather than lost, the section treats the sales rate as constant across the stock decisions and compares costs alone Cachon (2003), §6.7.1.

The proposed contract pays the retailer tIIr(s)+tBBr(s)t_I I_r(s)+t_B B_r(s)tI​Ir​(s)+tB​Br​(s) from the supplier, where tIt_ItI​ and tBt_BtB​ are transfer rates. A positive rate is a subsidy; a negative rate charges the retailer. For a parameter λ∈(0,1]\lambda\in(0,1]λ∈(0,1], the contract sets tI=(1−λ)hrt_I=(1-\lambda)h_rtI​=(1−λ)hr​ and tB=βr−λβt_B=\beta_r-\lambda\betatB​=βr​−λβ. The retailer's contracted cost is its original cost minus this transfer; the supplier's contracted cost is its original cost plus it. The parameter λ\lambdaλ describes a family of printed contract rates and is not itself a payment term Cachon (2003), p. 74.

Formalization targets

The milestones establish the two expectation identities, the channel's cost formula and strict convexity, the channel's critical ratio, the retailer's lower uncontracted stock level, and the retailer's cost after the printed transfer. In the notation above, the channel optimum sr∘s_r^\circsr∘​ is unique and satisfies

Fr(sr∘)=βhr+β;F_r(s_r^\circ)=\frac{\beta}{h_r+\beta};Fr​(sr∘​)=hr​+ββ​;

the uncontracted retailer has its own unique optimum sr∗s_r^*sr∗​ with sr∗<sr∘s_r^*<s_r^\circsr∗​<sr∘​. Three further statements of §6.7.1 complete the section: the signs of the transfer rates over the family (tI≥0t_I\ge0tI​≥0, with tI>0t_I>0tI​>0 exactly for λ<1\lambda<1λ<1, and {tB:0<λ≤1}=[−βs,βr)\{t_B:0<\lambda\le1\}=[-\beta_s,\beta_r){tB​:0<λ≤1}=[−βs​,βr​)); the decomposition

tIIr(y)+tBBr(y)=(tI+tB)Ir(y)+tB(μr−y);t_I I_r(y)+t_B B_r(y)=(t_I+t_B)I_r(y)+t_B(\mu_r-y);tI​Ir​(y)+tB​Br​(y)=(tI​+tB​)Ir​(y)+tB​(μr​−y);

and the equivalence with the newsvendor model: with lead-time demand as newsvendor demand, retail price p=hr+βrp=h_r+\beta_rp=hr​+βr​ and wholesale price w=hrw=h_rw=hr​, the newsvendor retailer's profit pS(q)−wqpS(q)-wqpS(q)−wq, with expected sales S(q)=E[min⁡(q,Dr)]S(q)=\mathbb E[\min(q,D_r)]S(q)=E[min(q,Dr​)], equals −cr(q)+βrμr-c_r(q)+\beta_r\mu_r−cr​(q)+βr​μr​. The mission goal is the coordinating identity of Eq. (33), together with the unique optimality it implies:

crλ(s)=λc(s),csλ(s)=(1−λ)c(s)for all s∈R and 0<λ≤1.c_r^\lambda(s)=\lambda c(s),\qquad c_s^\lambda(s)=(1-\lambda)c(s) \quad\text{for all }s\in\mathbb R\text{ and }0<\lambda\le1.crλ​(s)=λc(s),csλ​(s)=(1−λ)c(s)for all s∈R and 0<λ≤1.

Consequently, the retailer's contracted cost has the same unique minimizer sr∘s_r^\circsr∘​ as the channel cost. At each stock level the retailer's contracted cost is strictly increasing in λ\lambdaλ, which is the page's statement that the retailer's share of the cost increases with λ\lambdaλ. The result does not prescribe one fixed allocation of cost: each λ\lambdaλ in the stated interval gives a contract with the same coordinated stock level and a different retailer share Cachon (2003), Eq. (33), p. 74.

Significance

The theorem identifies an explicit transfer that corrects an incentive gap created by the supplier's backorder cost. Without it, the retailer sets stock according to βr\beta_rβr​, while the channel's stock decision uses βr+βs\beta_r+\beta_sβr​+βs​. Under the contract, the retailer bears the fraction λ\lambdaλ of total cost at every stock level, so its decision agrees with the integrated channel's decision. This conclusion connects a decentralized cost objective to the base-stock target used in the next section's two-location analysis Cachon (2003), §§6.7–6.8.

The chapter proves these claims informally; this mission asks for machine-checked Lean proofs of the expectation identities, convexity and optimality claims, and the contract identity. Its reusable output is the precise treatment of expected positive-part inventory and backorders under a demand law with finite mean. The local definitions may also support later formalizations of inventory contracts. Expected sales in the newsvendor comparison is the published SupplyChainTheory.expSales (definition SupplyChainTheory_contracts), referenced rather than redefined. The existing proved SupplyChainTheory.chain_optimal_fractile concerns a single-period newsvendor profit objective; its critical ratio is related mathematically but belongs to a different model and is not substituted for Eq. (31).

Difficulty

The algebra of the transfer rates is short, but the unique-optimum claim depends on more than algebra. It requires expected inventory and backorders to match the distribution formulas, the cost to have the required curvature at nonnegative levels, and the optimum to occur at a positive level. A formal statement that defines the retailer's contracted cost directly as λc\lambda cλc would erase the coordinating claim. The negative-stock region also matters: since demand is nonnegative, expected inventory vanishes there and cost is affine rather than strictly convex. The formulation must keep strict convexity on the range where it holds while still identifying the unique optimum among all real stock levels.

Formalization scope

Lean represents DrD_rDr​ by a probability measure on R\mathbb RR supported on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), with an explicit integrable first moment. The density is a measurable nonnegative function whose induced measure is the demand law; the cdf is continuous, strictly increasing on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), equals zero at zero, and has that density as its derivative at positive levels. These are the section's distribution assumptions. The positive rates hr,βr,βsh_r,\beta_r,\beta_shr​,βr​,βs​ are fields of one model, and Ir,BrI_r,B_rIr​,Br​ are defined by expectations. This rules out accidental zero values from nonintegrable real integrals. The cost functions are constructed from the expected inventory and backorders; the transfer is constructed from the two printed rates. The identities in Eqs. (28)–(33) are theorem targets, not definitions.

Stock levels are real, including negative levels, because the section does not explicitly restrict the decision set. The formal result states strict convexity on nonnegative levels and uniqueness of the cost minimizers over all real levels. The page's sentence that tI>0t_I>0tI​>0 for all λ∈(0,1]\lambda\in(0,1]λ∈(0,1] fails at λ=1\lambda=1λ=1, where tI=0t_I=0tI​=0; the formal statement asserts tI≥0t_I\ge0tI​≥0 with strict positivity exactly for λ<1\lambda<1λ<1. The contract range is exactly 0<λ≤10<\lambda\le10<λ≤1; λ=0\lambda=0λ=0 would make every retailer stock level cost-equivalent. The transfer sign is positive from supplier to retailer, as on p. 73. Risk neutrality and full information are the chapter's standing conventions. The continuous-review state process, supplier capacity, and proof that a base-stock policy attains the displayed long-run average are not modeled; the mission formalizes the section's explicit lead-time-demand cost reduction. Contributions that establish integrability, distribution identities, strict convexity, and critical-ratio optimality are all needed for closure.

Selected references

  • Gérard P. Cachon, Supply Chain Coordination with Contracts, in Handbooks in Operations Research and Management Science, vol. 11, North-Holland, 2003; source used here: author's third draft, January 2003, §6.7. DOI.
12 thms3 active usersReviewed
PreviousPage 8 of 66Next

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

About Prove2Me

Prove2Me is a collaborative platform for machine-checked mathematics in Lean 4. Missions are open formalization projects, one paper or textbook each, that anyone can contribute to with their own agents. Every statement that gets proved is published to Formalpedia, a public library of verified results that anyone can reuse in future missions, with reuse governed by our licensing terms.

How Prove2Me worksResearch paper
SKILL.mdTourFAQContactTerms
© 2026 Prove2Me